3RW44 System Manual

Table of Contents
Important Notes
SIRIUS
Soft Starter
3RW44
System Manual
Introduction
1
Configuration Instructions
2
Installation, Connection and
Branch Layout
3
Display, Controls and Device
Interfaces
4
Commissioning
5
Device Functions
6
Diagnosis and Messages
7
Communication Module
PROFIBUS DP
8
Circuit Examples
9
General Technical Data
Appendix
Configuration Data
Index
Correction Sheet
Order No.: 3ZX1012-0RW44-1AC1
Issue 04/2009
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
10
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to guarantee your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded
according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation
of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this
documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices,
systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as
well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2005. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer of liability
This document shall not be transmitted or reproduced, nor shall its
contents be exploited or disclosed to third persons without prior written
consent from Siemens. Infringements will be subject to damage claims.
All rights reserved, in particular in case of a patent grant of utility model
registration.
Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication for
conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot
guarantee complete conformity since errors cannot be excluded. The
information provided in this manual is checked at regular intervals and
any corrections which might become necessary will be included in the
next editions.
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
P.O. box 4848, 90327 Nuremberg, Germany
© Siemens AG 2005
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Subject to technical changes
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode of Operation of the Soft Starter .
3-phase Asynchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Configuration Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and Operating Software . . . . . .
Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal or Heavy Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-time and Switching Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
Installing the Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Mounting Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Mounting Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Branch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Soft Starters in Standard Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Control and Auxiliary Current Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Main Current Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Conductor Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
Display and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Display and Control Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-7
1-8
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
i
Table of Contents
5
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
5.4.12
5.4.13
5.4.14
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Menu Structure and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Switching on for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Quick Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
User-specific Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Main Menu Item "Settings" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Selecting the Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Entering the Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Specifying the Starting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Specifying the Stopping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting Slow Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Specifying Current Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Parameterizing the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Parameterizing the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Selecting Motor Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Selecting Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Specifying the Names on the Device Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Saving Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Other Device Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Display measured value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
6
Device Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Various Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Starting Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Voltage Ramp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode. . . . . . 6-7
Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode . . . . . . . 6-9
Starting Mode: Direct On Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Starting Mode: Motor Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Stopping Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Coasting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Torque Control and Pump Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
DC Braking / Combined Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Slow Speed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Inherent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
7
Diagnosis and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
Diagnosis, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Warnings and Group Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
ii
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
7.1.3
Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1
8.1.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Data Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the Display, Setting the Station
Address and Saving the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address via the Device Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the
"Soft Starter ES + SP1" Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Soft Starter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Configuration with the GSD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Diagnostics Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Integration into the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Process Data and Process Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Diagnosis via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Diagnosis with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Reading the Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Options for Reading the Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Station Status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Master PROFIBUS Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Manufacturer Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Code-Based Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Channel-Based Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Data Formats and Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Identification Number (ID No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
8.9.7
8.9.8
8.9.9
8.10
8.10.1
8.11
8.11.1
8.11.2
8.12
8.12.1
8.12.2
8.12.3
8.12.4
8.12.5
8.12.6
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
iii
Table of Contents
8.12.7
8.12.8
8.12.9
8.12.10
8.12.11
8.12.12
8.12.13
8.12.14
8.12.15
8.12.16
8.12.17
8.12.18
8.12.19
Data Set 82 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 83 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 93 - Writing a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Circuit Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.17
9.1.18
9.1.19
Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 22 to
3RW44 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 26 to
3RW44 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow Speed Function in both
Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local
(e. g. at the Control Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main Contactors with one Parameter
Set without Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Reversing Operation with Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and
2 Parameter Sets9-12
Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Parallel Starting of 3 Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with Safety Relay 3TK2823 and
3RW44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a Standard Circuit) . . . . . . . . 9-22
Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
10
General Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3.6
10.3.7
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Transport and Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Selection and Ordering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Technical Data Power Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Technical Data Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Conductor Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Utilization Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.1.9
9.1.10
9.1.11
9.1.12
9.1.13
9.1.14
9.1.15
9.1.16
iv
8-48
8-48
8-49
8-55
8-56
8-57
8-58
8-60
8-62
8-66
8-67
8-68
8-69
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
10.3.8
10.3.9
10.3.10
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.5
Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tripping Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-29
10-29
10-30
Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configuration-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fax-1
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
v
Table of Contents
vi
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Important Notes
Important Notes
Objective of this manual
This manual contains basics and tips on the application of SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starters. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is an electronic motor control device for
optimized starting and stopping of 3-phase asynchronous motors.
The manual describes all the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter functions.
Target group
The manual is aimed at all users who deal with
• commissioning,
• service and maintenance,
• planning and configuration of systems
Required basic knowledge
In order to understand this manual, general knowledge in the field of general
electrical engineering is required.
Validity
This manual is valid for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters. It contains a description of
the components that are valid at the time of publication of this manual. We
reserve the right to include an updated product information leaflet with new
components and new component versions.
Definitions
If the short form 3RW44 is used in the text, it refers to the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starter.
Standards and approvals
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter complies with the IEC/EN 60947-4-2 standard.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
vii
Important Notes
Disclaimer of liability
The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for ensuring the
correct overall functioning. SIEMENS AG, its branch offices and associated
companies (hereinafter referred to as "SIEMENS") cannot guarantee all
properties of a system or machine not designed by SIEMENS.
SIEMENS can also not assume liability for recommendations given or implied by
the following description. No new guarantee/warranty or liability claims in excess
of the general terms and conditions of SIEMENS can be deduced from the
following description.
Access aids
To facilitate and speed up access to special information, the manual contains the
following aids:
• A table of contents is listed at the beginning of the manual.
• The individual chapters contain subheadings to provide an overview of the
contents of the section.
• At the end of the manual, there is an extensive index to enable you to quickly
access the required information.
Always up-to-date information
For questions on motor starters, your regional contact persons for
communication-capable, low-voltage switchgear will be pleased to assist you.
You can find a list of contact persons, as well as the latest version of the manual,
on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
Please address technical questions to:
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET)
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of the manual. Please enter your
suggestions for improvement, supplementation and corrections, and send the
sheet back to us. This will help us to improve the next issue.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
viii
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
1
Introduction
Chapter
Subject
Page
1.1
Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode of
Operation of the Soft Starter
1-2
1.1.1
3-phase Asynchronous Motor
1-2
1.1.2
Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter
1-4
1.2
Application and Use
1-7
1.3
Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation
1-8
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
1-1
Introduction
1.1
Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode
of Operation of the Soft Starter
1.1.1 3-phase Asynchronous Motor
Applications of the
3-phase
asynchronous motor
Thanks to their robust, simple design and low-maintenance operation, 3-phase
asynchronous motors are used in large numbers in commercial applications,
trade and industry.
Problem
If switched on directly, the typical current and torque behavior of the 3-phase
asynchronous motor may negatively influence the feeding supply network and
the load machine during start-up.
Starting current
3-phase asynchronous motors have a high direct starting current I(starting).
Depending on the motor version, this current may be 3 times to 15 times the size
of the rated operating current. A typical value is 7 to 8 times the size of the motor
rated current.
Disadvantage
This results in the following disadvantage
• Higher load on the electrical supply network. This means that the supply
network must be dimensioned for this higher output during motor start-up.
Motor current
I
IDirect
on-line
starting
INom
nNom
Motor speed
n
001_Stromkurven ohne Sanftstarter.wmf
Figure 1-1: Typical starting current behavior of a 3-phase asynchronous motor
Start torque
The start torque and the stalling torque can usually be assumed to be between 2
and 4 times the rated operating torque. For the load machine, this means that
the starting and acceleration forces in relation to rated operation result in
increased mechanical load on the machine and the conveyed material.
Disadvantages
This results in the following disadvantages
• Higher load on mechanical parts of the machine
• Higher costs because of application wear and maintenance
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
Motor
torque
M
MDirect start
Motor
MNom
MAcceleration
MLoad
. .
e.g. pump
nNom
Motor speed
n
002_Drehmomentkurven ohne Softstarter.wmf
Mstall
Figure 1-2: Typical starting torque behavior of a 3-phase asynchronous motor
Solution
The current and torque behavior during start-up can be optimally adapted to the
requirement of the application using the SIRIUS 3RW44 electronic soft starter.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
1-3
Introduction
1.1.2 Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter
The 3RW44 soft starter has two antiparallel thyristors in each of the phases.
There is one thyristor for the positive and one thyristor for the negative half
wave.
Using phase angle control, the r.m.s. value of the motor voltage is increased
from a definable start voltage or start torque to the motor rated voltage within a
selectable starting time using various control methods.
The motor current acts proportional to the voltage applied to the motor. The
starting current is thus reduced by the factor of the voltage that is applied to the
motor.
The torque behaves quadratically in relation to the voltage applied to the motor.
The starting torque is thus reduced quadratically in relation to the voltage
applied to the motor.
Example
SIEMENS motor 1LG4253AA (55 kW)
Rated data at 400 V:
Pe :
55 kW
Ie :
100 A
IDirect on line starting :
approx. 700 A
Me :
355 Nm ;
Example: Me = 9.55 x 55 kW x
ne :
1480 min-1
MDirect on line starting :
approx. 700 Nm
Set start voltage:
50 % (1/2 line voltage)
1000
1480 min-1
=> IStart 1/2 of the direct on line start switch-on current (approx. 350 A)
=> MStart 1/4 of the direct on line start torque (approx. 175 Nm)
The following graphs illustrate the behavior of the starting current and torque of a
3-phase asynchronous motor in combination with a soft starter:
004_Stromkurven mit Sanftstarter.wmf
Motor current
I
IDirect
on-line
starting
ISoft starter
INom
nNom
Motor speed
n
Figure 1-3: Reduced current behavior of the 3-phase asynchronous motor during start-up
with the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
MDirect
on-line
starting
MNom
1
2
3
1 M
Soft start
voltage ramp
nNom
Motor speed
n
005_Drehmomentkurven mit Sanftstarter.wmf
Motor torque
M
2 M
Soft start
torque-controlled
3
MLoad (e.g. pump)
Figure 1-4: Reduced torque behavior of the 3-phase asynchronous motor during start-up
with the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
1-5
Introduction
Starting
This means that because the electronic soft starter controls the motor voltage
during motor start-up, it simultaneously controls the ingoing starting current and
the starting torque generated in the motor.
The same principle is also used during the stopping process. The effect is that
the torque generated in the motor is slowly reduced, thus enabling soft stopping
of the application.
During this process, the frequency remains constant and corresponds to the line
frequency, contrary to the frequency-controlled starting and stopping of a
frequency converter.
Upon completion of motor run-up, the thyristors are fully utilized, resulting in the
complete line voltage being applied to the motor terminals. Since no motor
voltage control is required during operation, the thyristors are bridged by
integrated bypass contacts. This reduces the waste heat which develops during
continuous operation and is caused by power loss of the thyristor. Therefore, the
area around the switching devices heats up less.
003_Phasenanschnitt und Thyristoren mit Bypass.dsf
The following graph illustrates the mode of operation of the 3RW44 soft starter:
L2
L1
UL1-
L3
U
L3
L1 -L3
α
α
α
α
α
ϕtϕ
G1
M
3~
Figure 1-5: Phase angle control and schematic layout of a soft starter with internal bypass contacts
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
1.2
Application and Use
Applications and
selection criteria
3RW44 soft starters are an alternative to star-delta starters and frequency
converters.
Their major benefits are soft starting and soft stop, uninterrupted changeover
without current peaks that would stress the power supply, and their compact
dimensions.
Numerous drives which previously could only be operated with frequency
converters can be changed over to soft starter operation using the 3RW44 soft
starter, as long as no speed control, no particularly high starting torque or
start-up with close to nominal current is required.
Applications
Possible applications include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advantages
Conveyor belts
Powered roller conveyors
Compressors
Ventilators, fans
Pumps
Hydraulic pumps
Stirrers
Centrifugal machines
Milling machines
Mills
Crushers
Circular saws/ribbon saws
...
Conveyor belts and transport systems:
• Jerk-free starting
• Jerk-free braking
Centrifugal pumps, reciprocating pumps:
• Water hammering is avoided
• Increased service life of the pipe system
Stirrers, mixers:
• Reduced starting current
Fans:
• Reduced stress on transmissions and V-belts
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
1-7
Introduction
1.3
Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation
Permissible ambient temperature for
- Storage
-25 °C ... +80 °C
- Operation
0 °C ... +60 °C, from 40 °C with derating
(refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data")
Permissible relative air humidity
10 ... 95 %
Maximum permissible installation
altitude
5,000 m, from 1,000 m with derating
Caution
Please ensure that no liquid, dust or conductive parts
enter the soft starter!
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
2
Configuration Instructions
Chapter
Subject
Page
2.1
Configuration
2-2
2.1.1
RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and
Operating Software
2-2
2.1.2
Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program
2-2
2.1.3
Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO)
2-2
2.2
Normal or Heavy Starting
2-3
2.2.1
Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10)
2-3
2.2.2
Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20)
2-3
2.2.3
Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30)
2-4
2.3
On-time and Switching Frequency
2-5
2.4
Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature
2-6
2.5
Basic Factory Settings
2-7
2.6
Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters
2-8
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2-1
Configuration Instructions
2.1
Configuration
The electronic 3RW44 soft starters are designed for normal starting. A model
with a higher output may be necessary for heavy starting or for a higher starting
frequency.
A PTC thermistor in the motor is recommended for long starting times. This also
applies to the soft stop, pump stop and DC braking stopping modes, since during
the stopping time, there is an additional current load in contrast to coasting
down.
Capacitive elements (e.g. compensation systems) must not be included in the
motor branch between the soft starter and the motor. Active filters must not be
operated in combination with soft starters.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and switching devices) must be
dimensioned for direct on line starting according to the local short-circuit
conditions, and should be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load of the starting current must be taken into account
when selecting circuit breakers (release selection).
2.1.1 RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and Operating Software
The electronic 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with a PC interface to
communicate with the Soft Starter ES software and an operating and monitoring
module (display).
2.1.2 Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program
This software allows all SIEMENS soft starters to be simulated and selected
using various parameters such as network conditions, motor data, load data,
special application requirements, etc.
The software is a powerful tool which makes time-consuming and complex
manual calculations for determining the suitable soft starter a thing of the past.
The Win Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be downloaded at:
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter >Software.
2.1.3 Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO)
Siemens offers a two-day training course on electronic SIRIUS soft starters to
keep both our customers and Siemens personnel up-to-date on configuration,
commissioning and maintenance.
If you have any questions or would like to enroll, please contact:
Erlangen Training Center
A&D PT 4
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65
91052 Erlangen, Germany
Phone: ++49 9131 729262
Fax: ++49 9131 728172
[email protected]
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
2-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration Instructions
2.2
Normal or Heavy Starting
To properly dimension a soft starter, it is important to know and take into account
the starting time (normal or heavy starting) of the application. Long starting times
mean a higher thermal load for the thyristors of the soft starter. The 3RW44 soft
starters are designed for continuous operation under normal starting conditions
(CLASS 10), an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius and a fixed
switching frequency. You can also find these values in Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical
Data Power Unit". If deviations from these data occur, it may be necessary to
overdimension the soft starter. Using the Win Soft Starter selection and
simulation program from SIEMENS, you can enter your application data and
requirements, and the optimum soft starter for your application will be
dimensioned (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories" software).
Note
The appropriate size of the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter must be selected on the
basis of the motor rated current
(Rated currentsoft starter ≥ motor rated current).
Selection criteria
2.2.1 Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10)
Normal starting CLASS 10 (up to 20 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter's output can be the same as that of the implemented motor
Application
Conveyor belts
Powered roller
conveyors
Compressors
Small ventilators Pumps
Hydraulic pumps
70
10
deactivated
60
10
deactivated
50
10
4 x IM
30
10
4 x IM
30
10
deactivated
30
10
deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Start torque
- End torque
- Starting time
60
150
10
50
150
10
40
150
10
20
150
10
10
150
10
10
150
10
• Breakaway pulse
deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode
Soft stop
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Start voltage
- Starting time
- Current limiting value
%
s
Soft stop
Coasting down
Coasting down
Pump stop
Coasting down
2.2.2 Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20)
Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor),
The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 1 class higher than that of the implemented motor
Application
Stirrers
Centrifugal machines
Milling machines
30
30
4 x IM
30
30
4 x IM
30
30
4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Start torque
- End torque
- Starting time
30
150
30
30
150
30
30
150
30
• Breakaway pulse
deactivated (0 ms)
deactivated (0 ms)
deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode
Coasting down
Coasting down
Coasting down or DC braking
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Start voltage
- Starting time
- Current limiting value
%
s
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2-3
Configuration Instructions
2.2.3 Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30)
Very heavy starting CLASS 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),
The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 2 classes higher than that of the implemented motor
Application
Large fans
Mills
Crushers
Circular saws/ribbon saws
30
60
4 x IM
50
60
4 x IM
50
60
4 x IM
30
60
4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Start torque
- End torque
- Starting time
20
150
60
50
150
60
50
150
60
20
150
60
• Breakaway pulse
deactivated (0 ms)
80 %; 300 ms
80 %; 300 ms
deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode
Coasting down
Coasting down
Coasting down
Coasting down
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Start voltage
- Starting time
- Current limiting value
%
s
Note
These tables provide example set values and device dimensionings. They serve
as information only and are not binding. The set values are applicationdependent and must be optimized during commissioning.
Soft starter dimensioning should, if necessary, be verified with the help of the
Win Soft Starter program or via the Technical Assistance in the Chapter
"Important Notes" .
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
2-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration Instructions
2.3
On-time and Switching Frequency
In terms of motor rated current and normal or heavy starting, the 3RW44 soft
starters are dimensioned for a maximum permissible switching frequency in
combination with a relative on-time. Please also refer to Chapter 10.3.2
"Technical Data Power Unit". If these values are exceeded, you may have to
select a larger soft starter.
On-time OT
The relative on-time OT in % corresponds to the relationship between the load
duration and the cycle duration of loads that are frequently switched on and off.
The on-time OT can be calculated using the following formula:
ts + tb
OT = ------------------------ts + tb + tp
Explanation of the formula:
OT
ts
tb
tp
On-time [%]
Starting time [s]
Operating time [s]
Idle time [s]
The following graph illustrates the procedure.
Ie
ts
tb
tp
t
Figure 2-1: On-time OT
Switching frequency
To prevent thermal overloading of the devices, the maximum permissible
switching frequency must be adhered to under all circumstances.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2-5
Configuration Instructions
2.4
Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature
The permissible installation altitude must not exceed 5,000 m above sea level
(above 5,000 m on request).
If the installation altitude exceeds 1,000 m, the rated operating current must be
reduced for thermal reasons.
If the installation altitude exceeds 2,000 m, the rated voltage must also be
reduced because of the limited insulation strength. For installation altitudes
between 2,000 m and 5,000 m above sea level, only rated voltages ≤ 460 V are
allowed.
The following illustration shows the reduction in the rated device current in
relation to the installation altitude:
The rated operating current I e must be reduced when installed at 1,000 m above
sea level or higher.
Figure 2-2: Current reduction in relation to the installation altitude
Ambient temperature
The 3RW44 soft starters are designed to be operated with a nominal current at
an ambient temperature of 40 ° Celsius. If this temperature is exceeded,
e.g. due to excessive heating up in the control cabinet, other loads or due to a
higher general ambient temperature, this will influence the performance of the
soft starter and must be taken into account in the dimensioning process (refer to
Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data Power Unit").
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
2-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration Instructions
2.5
Basic Factory Settings
Apply the basic factory settings (default settings)
• in the event of faulty parameterization
• if SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters that have already been parameterized are to be
further used in other systems.
Note
If this is not done, the present parameterization might cause drives to start
running.
Soft starters already parameterized by the operator can be set back to the basic
factory settings without requiring additional auxiliary tools.
To reset to the basic factory settings, refer to "Restoring the factory settings" on
Page 5-40.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2-7
Configuration Instructions
2.6
Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters
Order number classification using the 3RW44 22-6BC44 as an example
3RW4
4
22
I
II
III
-
6
B
C
4
4
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
*Gray fields cannot be configured
I
II
Designation of the basic unit:
Semiconductor AC motor control device (soft starter)
Device version:
4
III
High End soft starter
Rated operating power Pe (at Ue 400 V)
Rated operating current Ie (for utilization category AC-53a) (at TU 40 °C)
IV
V
Pe
Ie
22
-
15 kW
29 A
45
23
-
18.5 kW
36 A
46
-
200 kW
356 A
24
-
22 kW
47 A
47
-
250 kW
432 A
25
-
30 kW
57 A
53
-
315 kW
551 A
26
-
37 kW
77 A
54
-
355 kW
615 A
27
-
45 kW
93 A
55
-
400 kW
693 A
34
-
55 kW
113 A
56
-
450 kW
780 A
35
-
75 kW
134 A
57
-
500 kW
880 A
36
-
90 kW
162 A
58
-
560 kW
970 A
43
-
110 kW
203 A
65
-
630 kW
1,076 A
44
-
132 kW
250 A
66
-
710 kW
1,214 A
VIII
Ie
313 A
Type of connection
-
Standard screw connection (main/auxiliary conductor connection)
(for devices ≤ 3RW44 27)
2
-
Main conductor: Busbar connection / auxiliary conductor: Springtype terminal (for devices > 3RW44 27)
3
-
Main conductor: Screw connection / auxiliary conductor: Spring-type
terminal (for devices ≤ 3RW44 27)
6
-
Main conductor: Busbar connection / auxiliary conductor: Screwtype terminal (for devices > 3RW44 27)
Special function:
-
With bypass
Number of controlled phases:
C
VII
Pe
160 kW
1
B
VI
-
-
All 3 phases controlled
Rated control supply voltage Us:
3
-
115 V AC
4
-
230 V AC
Rated operational voltage Ue:
4
-
200 to 460 V
5
-
400 to 600 V
6
-
400 to 690 V
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
2-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
Chapter
Subject
3
Page
3.1
Installing the Soft Starter
3-2
3.1.1
Unpacking
3-2
3.1.2
Mounting Position
3-2
3.1.3
Standards
3-2
3.1.4
Mounting Dimensions and Clearances
3-3
3.2
Branch Layout
3-4
3.2.1
General
3-4
3.2.2
Soft Starters in Standard Circuits
3-5
3.2.3
Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits
3-6
3.2.4
Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor)
3-8
3.3
Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits
3-9
3.4
Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement
3-10
3.5
3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous Motor)
3-10
3.6
Electrical Connection
3-10
3.6.1
Control and Auxiliary Current Connection
3-10
3.6.2
Main Current Connection
3-11
3.6.3
Conductor Cross-Sections
3-12
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-1
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.1
Installing the Soft Starter
3.1.1 Unpacking
Caution
Do not lift the device by the lid when unpacking it, as this may damage the
device.
3.1.2 Mounting Position
22,5° 22,5°
90°
90°
NSB00649
The unit should be mounted on vertical, level surfaces.
Figure 3-1: Mounting position
3.1.3 Standards
Degree of protection
IP00
The 3RW44 soft starters comply with degree of protection IP00.
Taking into account the ambient conditions, the devices must be installed in IP54
control cabinets (degree of pollution 2).
Make sure that no liquids, dust or conductive parts can enter the soft starter.
Operation of the soft starter produces waste heat (power loss) (refer to Chapter
10 "General Technical Data").
Caution
Ensure sufficient cooling where the unit is installed to prevent the switching
device from overheating.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.1.4 Mounting Dimensions and Clearances
For uninhibited cooling, aeration and de-aeration of the heat sink, it is essential
that the minimum clearance to other devices is strictly observed.
≥ 100 mm
[≥ 4 in]
11
3
5
≥ 5 mm
[≥ 0.2 in]
≥ 5 mm
[≥ 0.2 in]
2
4
6
≥ 75 mm
[≥ 3 in]
Figure 3-2: Clearance to other devices
Notice
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance so that air can freely circulate for
cooling. The device is ventilated from bottom to top.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-3
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.2
Branch Layout
Warning
Automatic restart.
May result in death, serious injury or damage to property.
The automatic reset mode must not be used in applications where the
unexpected restart of the motor may lead to personal injury or
damage to property.
The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset
command is issued, since an automatic restart is executed when a
start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This
especially applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, it is
recommended that the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) be
integrated into the control.
3.2.1 General
A motor branch consists of (at least) a disconnector, a switching element and
a motor.
Protection functions must include line protection against short-circuits and
overload protection for line and motor.
Disconnector
The disconnecting function with line protection against overload and shortcircuits can be achieved by using, for example, a circuit breaker or a fuse
disconnector.
(For fuse and circuit breaker assignment, refer to Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch
Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" and Chapter 10.3.8 "Branch Component
Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)".
Switching element
The 3RW44 soft starter performs the functions of the switching element and the
motor protection.
Danger
Dangerous voltage.
Danger to life or risk of serious injury.
If line voltage is applied to the input terminals of the
soft starter, there may be dangerous voltages at the soft starter output
even without a start command! When working on the branch, this
must be disconnected using a disconnector (open isolating distance,
e.g. with open switch disconnector)!
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.2.2 Soft Starters in Standard Circuits
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is connected in the motor branch between the
disconnector or circuit breaker and the motor.
The 3RW44 soft starter automatically detects the type of connection of the soft
starter, meaning that this does not have to be explicitly set on the device. The
detected connection type can be read on the starter under the menu item "Status
display/Type of connection". In this case, the
display reads "Star/delta". If the circuitry is faulty or the motor is not connected,
the display shows "Unknown".
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
PE
Q1
Q11
G1
M1
U1
W2
V1
W1
U1
V1
W1
U2
V2
W2
U2
V2
008_Standardschaltung Zeichnung mit Bildern 50%.wmf
Figure 3-3: Schematic circuit diagrams for 3RW44 soft starters in standard circuits
Notice
If a main or line contactor is used, this contactor must not be connected
between the soft starter and the motor or in the return line between the motor
and the soft starter. The soft starter would otherwise not recognize the current
circuit version (standard circuit or inside delta circuit) and would output the error
message: "Missing load phase 1-3", or ensure that the circuit is closed before
the 3RW44 is activated.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-5
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.2.3 Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits
Prerequisite
A motor whose windings can be connected in a delta circuit where a line voltage
prevails.
Example
Line voltage:
400 V
Rated motor current:
40.5 A
Current via soft starter in an inside delta circuit:
approx.
24 A
Selected soft starter in an inside delta circuit:
3RW44 22
typenschild.jpg
Figure 3-4: Name plate of a 22 kW motor
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be dimensioned to match the current flowing
in the motor section (58 % of the conductor current) by connecting it to the delta
winding of the motor. This requires at least 6 motor lines.
The 3RW44 soft starter automatically detects how it is connected, meaning that
the connection type does not have to be explicitly set on the device. The
detected connection type can be read on the starter under the menu item "Status
display/Type of connection". In this case, the display reads "Inside delta circuit".
If the circuitry is faulty or the motor is not connected, the display shows
"Unknown".
Notice
The rated motor current given on the name plate must always be set in the quick
start menu or in the motor adjustment menu item. This setting is independent of
the type of connection of the soft starter.
Value to be set in the above example for a line voltage of 400 V, e.g. 40.5 A.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
Notice
The DC braking and combined braking device functions are no longer available
for inside delta circuits.
In order to ensure proper functioning of the soft starter, the electrical connection
of the main voltage (line and motor side) must be made according to the given
circuit examples (refer to Section Chapter 9.1 "Connection Examples for Main
and Control Circuits").
L1 3/N/PE~50 Hz 400 V
L1 3/N/PE~50 Hz 400 V
L2
L2
L3
L3
PE
PE
Q1
Q1
F3
F3
Q11
Q11
M1
M1
U1
V1
W1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
W2
U2
V2
Motor rotation in phase direction
Motor rotation counterclockwise to phase direction
Figure 3-5: Schematic circuit diagram of a 3RW44 soft starter in an inside delta circuit
Notice
If a main or line contactor is used, this contactor must not be connected
between the soft starter and the motor or in the return line between the motor
and the soft starter. The soft starter would otherwise not recognize the current
circuit version (standard circuit or inside delta circuit) and would output the error
message: "Load phases 1-3 missing".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-7
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.2.4 Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor)
If galvanic decoupling is required, a motor contactor can be installed between
the soft starter and the disconnector, or a fault output relay can be used. (Refer
to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data" for the contactor assignment)
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
PE
Q1
Q11
G1
M1
U1
V1
W1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
W2
U2
V2
011_Standardschaltung und Hauptschütz Zeichnung mit Bildern.vsd
Q21
K1
Figure 3-6: Schematic circuit diagram of branch with optional main contactor / contactor
disconnector
Notice
If a main or line contactor is used, this contactor must not be connected
between the soft starter and the motor or in the return line between the motor
and the soft starter. The soft starter would otherwise not recognize the current
circuit version (standard circuit or inside delta circuit) and would output the error
message: "Load phases 1-3 missing".
Notice
With 3RW44 product version *E08* (FW V 1.9.0) the simultaneous and/or prior
switch-off of the main contactor and removal of the on command at the soft
starter may lead to direct on line starting behavior of the motor when restarting.
Include a tripping delay of 1 s for the main conductor or control the main
conductor via an output with parameterized "On-time" function as described in
circuit diagram 9.1.2.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.3
Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits
(Utilization class 2)
The soft starter has integrated thyristor protection against overloading. In the
event of a short-circuit, e.g. due to a defect in the windings of the motor or a
short-circuit via the motor supply cable, this internal thyristor protection function
is not sufficient. Special semiconductor fuses, e.g. SITOR fuses from SIEMENS,
must be used for this purpose.
(Refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data" for the fuse assignment)
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
012_Standardschaltung und Sitor Zeichnung mit Bildern.vsd
PE
Q1
F3
Q11
G1
M1
U1
V1
W1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
W2
U2
V2
Figure 3-7: Schematic circuit diagram of branch with semiconductor fuses
Note
Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" indicates fuses
for minimum and maximum dimensionings.
Minimum dimensioning: The fuse is optimized for the I²t value of the thyristor. If
the thyristor is cold (ambient temperature) and the starting procedure lasts a
maximum of 20 s with 3.5 times the rated device current, the fuse does not yet
trip.
Maximum dimensioning: The fuse does not trip and the thyristor is not damaged
even if the maximum permissible current for the thyristor is flowing.
Maximum dimensioning is recommended for heavy starting.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-9
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.4
Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement
Caution
Capacitors must not be connected to the output terminals of the
soft starter. If this occurs, the soft starter will be damaged.
Active filters, e.g. for reactive power compensation, must not be
operated in parallel while the motor control device is in operation.
If capacitors for reactive power compensation are used, they must be connected
on the line side of the device. If a contactor disconnector or a main contactor is
used in combination with the electronic soft starter, the capacitors must be
disconnected from the soft starter when the contactor is open.
3.5
3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous
Motor)
The 3RW44 soft starters are suitable for generator operation.
Note
Depending on the operating speed, connect the generator to the system while in
the subsynchronous range (motor operation) and slowly move the machine into
the supersynchronous range. Connecting the generator directly in the
supersynchronous range may cause soft starter faults.
3.6
Electrical Connection
3.6.1 Control and Auxiliary Current Connection
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is supplied with two different connection
systems:
• Screw-type terminals
• Spring-loaded terminals
Two control voltage versions are available:
• 115 V AC
• 230 V AC
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-10
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.6.2 Main Current Connection
All soft starters are equipped with busbar connections for the main
current connection.
Size 3RW44 2.
An additional box terminal for direct cable connection is supplied as standard
with size 3RW44 2. devices.
Sizes 3RW44 3. and
3RW44 4.
For size 3RW44 3. and 3RW44 4. devices, it is possible to retrofit box terminals
as optional accessories (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories").
2.
1.
A1
A2
PE
L+
L-
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
T1
T2
d.c./c.d. 24 V
V
1L1 50230
- 60 Hz
3L2
5L3
SIRIUS
ESC
G/031127123
OK
LOCAL INTERFACE
*E00*
3RW4422-1BC44
Ue= 200...460V
2T1
4T2
NO
13
14
NO
23
24
NO
33
34
6T3
NC NO
95
96
98
2.
1.
1.
A1, A2, PE, L+, L-, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, T1, T2, 13, 14, 23, 24, 33, 34, 95, 96, 98:
Control/auxiliary circuit
2.
L1/L2/L3
Main circuit infeed
3.
T1/T2/T3
Main circuit outgoing feeder load
Figure 3-8: Connections
Notice
The connection of the 3-phase network supply to terminals T1/T2/T3 is not
permissible.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3-11
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.6.3 Conductor Cross-Sections
A1, A2, PE, L+, L-, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, T1, T2, 13, 14, 23, 24, 33, 34, 95, 96, 98
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2
10
10
10
AWG
3RW44..-1....
3RW44..-6....
3RW44..-2....
3RW44..-3....
0.8 ... 1.2 Nm
7 to 10.3 lb· in
—
1 x 0.5 ... 4.0 mm²
2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²
2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 mm²
1 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²
2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
—
2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
2 x 20 to 14
2 x 24 to 16
L1, L2, L3; T1, T2, T3
3RW44 2.-....
4 ... 6 Nm
36 ... 53 lb· in
4
min 22
3RW44 3.-....
3RW44 4.-....
10 ... 14 Nm
89 ... 124 lb· in
M8x25
3RW44 5.-.... / 3RW44 6.-....
14 ... 24 Nm
124 ... 210 lb· in
M10x30
20 ... 35 Nm
177 ... 310 lb· in
M12x40
2 x 10 ... 70 mm²
2 x AWG 7 ... 1/0
2 x 25 ... 120 mm²
2 x AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil
2 x 70 ... 240 mm²
2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
2 x 70 ... 240 mm²
2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
2 x 10 ... 50 mm²
2 x AWG 7 ... 1/0
2 x 16 ... 95 mm²
2 x AWG 6 ... 3/0
2 x 50 ...240 mm²
2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
2 x 50 ...240 mm²
2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
b
b≤17 mm
b
b ≤25 mm
b
b≤60 mm
17
2 x 2.5 ... 16 mm²
—
—
—
—
—
—
17
2 x 2.5 ... 35 mm²
1 x 2.5 ... 50 mm²
—
—
—
—
—
—
2 x 10 ... 50 mm²
1 x 10 ... 70 mm²
2 x AWG 10 ... 1/0
1 x AWG 10 ... 2/0
—
—
—
—
—
—
17
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3-12
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces
Chapter
Subject
4
Page
4.1
Display and Controls
4-2
4.2
Device Interfaces
4-3
4.2.1
Local Device Interface
4-3
4.2.2
PROFIBUS Interface (Optional)
4-3
4.3
External Display and Control Unit (Optional)
4-3
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4-1
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces
4.1
Display and Controls
Graphic display
A graphic display on the front of the device provides information about the
functions and status of the soft starter via plain text and symbols when control
voltage is applied.
1 2 3
1. Displays the control unit
that has current control
priority, i.e. that sends the
control commands for the
motor.
2. Displays the defined
user level.
Customer read
only
Customer write
3. Displays the current
motor status.
No motor
Run up
Display with keys
Motor running
Serial interface
Coasting down
Control inputs
Motor ready to
start
PLC via PROFIBUS
PC via bus
?
No control device
Figure 4-1: Explanation of symbols
Controls
There are four keys for operating and adjusting the soft starter:
OK
The current function, depending on the menu item, is shown as text on the
display above this key (e.g. select menu, change value or save settings).
The up/down arrow keys are used to navigate through the menu items or to
change number values in the settings menu item.
ESC
The ESC key is used to quit the current menu item and to jump back to the
higher-level menu item.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
4-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces
4.2
Device Interfaces
4.2.1 Local Device Interface
A local device interface on the front side of the starter is provided as standard.
This interface can be used to connect either an optional external operating and
display module, or the "Soft Starter ES" operating, monitoring and
parameterizing software (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories", Software) using
a PC and connecting cable.
4.2.2 PROFIBUS Interface (Optional)
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be equipped with an optional PROFIBUS
module (only available for products delivered after 04/06). The soft starter can
be connected to PROFIBUS, operated and parameterized via the interface. The
"Soft Starter ES" operating, monitoring and parameterizing software (refer to
Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories", Software) can also be connected to this interface
using a PC and connecting cable.
Simultaneous operation of a 3RW44 with a PROFIBUS interface is not possible
in networks where one external conductor is grounded.
4.3
External Display and Control Unit (Optional)
When de-energized, the external display and control unit can be connected to
the local device interface via a special connecting cable.
After being switched on, the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter automatically recognizes
that the external display and control unit has been connected. The 3RW44
display will be inverted and the display and control unit's display will be shown
normally.
The control keys of the 3RW44 will be inactive, meaning that normal handling is
only possible via the external display and control unit.
→ For ordering data, see Chapter 10.3.9.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4-3
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
4-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5
Commissioning
Chapter
Subject
Page
5.1
Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters
5-2
5.1.1
Menu Structure and Navigation
5-2
5.1.2
Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data
5-3
5.2
Switching on for the First Time
5-4
5.2.1
Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning
5-4
5.2.2
Quick Start Menu
5-6
5.3
User-specific Commissioning
5-8
5.3.1
Main Menu Item "Settings"
5-9
5.4
Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set
5-10
5.4.1
Selecting the Parameter Set
5-10
5.4.2
Entering the Motor Data
5-11
5.4.3
Specifying the Starting Mode
5-13
5.4.4
Specifying the Stopping Mode
5-20
5.4.5
Setting Slow Speed Parameters
5-26
5.4.6
Specifying Current Limit Values
5-27
5.4.7
Parameterizing the Inputs
5-28
5.4.8
Parameterizing the Outputs
5-29
5.4.9
Selecting Motor Protection Settings
5-31
5.4.10 Selecting Display Settings
5-33
5.4.11 Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions
5-34
5.4.12 Specifying the Names on the Device Display
5-35
5.4.13 Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP)
5-36
5.4.14 Saving Options
5-37
5.5
Other Device Functions
5-41
5.5.1
Display measured value
5-41
5.5.2
Status Display
5-42
5.5.3
Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority)
5-43
5.5.4
Statistics
5-44
5.5.5
Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection)
5-48
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-1
Commissioning
5.1
Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters
The 3RW44 functions (parameterization, diagnosis and motor control) can be
executed using the four control keys. The menu has various sublevels which
must be handled in different ways but are self-explanatory.
5.1.1 Menu Structure and Navigation
Main menu level
1. Sub menu level
2. Sub menu level
3. Sub menu level
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
Status
display
2
select
ESC
OK
Settings
Settings
33
select
select
ESC
Parameter
set 1
1
OK
select
Motor
control
ESC
select
ESC
OK
Parameter
set 2
1
select
2
ESC
OK
Rated operating
current Ie
29.0 A
change
select
5
ESC
select
select
OK
Safety
Inputs
OK
Starting
settings
2
ESC
OK
2
select
3
ESC
select
6
select
select
OK
Parameter
set 3
ESC
ESC
1
OK
Statistics
ESC
Motor 1
4
OK
OK
Stopping
settings
change
3
ESC
ESC
OK
3
select
4
Rated operating
torque
100 Nm
OK
Rated operating
speed
1500
change
Figure 5-1: Menu structure
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.1.2 Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
Status
display
2
select
ESC
OK
Settings
Settings
33
select
select
OK
ESC
Parameter
set 1
1
select
ESC
OK
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
1
Rated operating
current Ie
29.0 A
change
ESC
OK
Rated operating
current Ie
29.0 A
execute
ESC
OK
Rated operating
current Ie
28.9 A
execute
ESC
OK
1
Rated operating
current Ie
28.9 A
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-2: Changing values, e.g. adjusting motor data
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-3
Commissioning
5.2
Switching on for the First Time
Warning
Before switching the device on for the first time, verify that the main/control
side is wired properly. Make sure that the line and control voltage comply with
the device-specific requirements (Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data").
5.2.1 Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning
Starting parameters
Suggested setting
Starting mode: Voltage ramp and current limiting
(U+current limiting)
Start
Starting
voltage
time s
%
Current
limiting
value
Conveyor belts
70
10
deactivated deactivated (0 ms)
Powered roller
conveyors
60
10
Compressors
50
Small ventilators
Stopping parameters
Stopping mode
Parameter
Stopping
time s
Stopping
torque
%
Torque control
10
10
deactivated deactivated (0 ms)
Torque control
10
10
10
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
30
10
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Pumps
30
10
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Pump stop
10
10
Hydraulic pumps
30
10
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Stirrers
30
30
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Centrifugal machines 30
30
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Milling machines
30
30
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Large fans
30
60
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Mills
50
60
4 x Ie
80 % / 300 ms
Coasting down
X
X
Crushers
50
60
4 x Ie
80 % / 300 ms
Coasting down
X
X
Circular saws/ribbon
saws
30
60
4 x Ie
deactivated (0 ms)
Coasting down
X
X
Breakaway pulse
Application
Notice
This table provides example set values. They are intended informational purposes only
and are non-binding. The set values depend on the particular application and must be
optimized during commissioning.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Quick commissioning
3RW44 SIRIUS soft starter
Quick start menu, when switching on for the
first time or after executing a command
"Basic factory settings"
Information on quick start menu:
After applying the control voltage for the first
time, you will be automatically directed to the
quick start menu. You must complete the entire
quick start menu once to commission the soft
starter for the first time.
If you confirm the last item, "Save settings?", by
entering "yes" in the quick start menu, you can
only return to this menu by resetting the device
back to its basic factory settings. (See manual or
operating instructions)
This overwrites all settings made up until that
point.
Information on application selection:
Standard parameters are recommended due to
the set type of application.
If the required load is not listed, choose a fan in
order to preselect the necessary start
parameters.
In general:
The parameters are suggested settings.
The parameters may need to be optimized, as
explained from Section "Start command 'Soft
starter on'" onwards.
Wiring inspection
- Control unit and
- Power unit
Check and connect the
voltages in the control and
main circuits
Select language
"Soft starter off"
Correct fault (for possible faults
see Chapter 7)
Yes
Fault message
on display?
Select application
No
Yes
Initial parameterization
or starter in basic
factory settings?
Set the rated operating
current of the motor
No
Set starting time
Check set parameters in Settings > Parameter set > Motor.
Set current limiting
value
Set starting and stopping parameters in Settings > Parameter
set > Starting or stopping settings according to the table
"Suggested setting for commissioning" on the basis of the
respective application.
Save settings
"Soft starter off"
Correct fault
(for possible faults see
Chapter 7)
Start command "Soft starter on"
1. "Soft starter off"
2. Increase starting time in
menu item Settings, or
3. if current limiting has
been set, possibly reduce
current limiting value
The motor reaches its
nominal rotational
speed
- quicker than desired
with an excessively
high starting current
- not softly
- according to the
specified ramp time if
no current limiting has
been set
1. "Soft starter off"
2. Reduce starting time in menu
item Settings or if current
limiting has been set, increase
the current limiting value.
3. If the torque control is active,
check whether the selected
limiting torque is high enough
(recommended ³ 150 %)
The motor reaches
its nominal rotational
speed
- slower than
desired,
- not at all
(motor stuck)
Motor:
1. "Soft starter off"
2. Increase the start voltage or
start torque in menu item
Settings or
3. if current limiting has been
set, possibly increase current
limiting value
The motor
- hums and does
not start
immediately
- does not start at
all
(motor stuck)
1. "Soft starter off"
2. Decrease the start
voltage or start torque
in menu item Settings
Yes
Fault message
in display
No
The motor
starts with a
strong
sudden
increase in
torque
Motor:
No
No
Does the motor
immediately start
softly?
Yes
Does the motor reach
its nominal rotational
speed quickly and within
the desired time?
Yes
Switch off soft
starter
Increase
stopping
time or
decrease
stopping
torque
The motor
stops
abruptly,
not softly.
The water
can be
heard
during
pump
operation.
Decrease
stopping
time
Soft stop
Pump stop
Increase DC braking
torque or increase
stopping time
The
motor
continu
es to
run for
too
long.
Reduce DC braking
torque or reduce
stopping time
The
motor
does not
come to
a
standstill DC braking
Increase
dynamic
braking torque
Increase DC braking
torque or increase
stopping time
The
Reduce DC braking
No
motor
torque or reduce
Does the motor
comes to Yes
stopping time
continue to run during the
a
braking process at a
standstill
The motor
constant speed (no
but the
comes to a
recognizable
braking
standstill
braking effect)?
current
but the
continues
braking
to flow.
Motor does not
current
(Motor
comes to a
continues to
hums
standstill, or
flow. (Motor
when at a
Combined braking
continues to run at
hums when
standstill)
a constant speed
at a
during the braking
standstill)
process
Which
stopping mode
is selected?
Coasting down
Pump stop,
torque control,
braking
Motor
comes to a
standstill as
desired
Yes
Save the changed parameters in
the menu item: Settings > Saving
options > Save settings.
Commissioning is complete.
No
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-5
Commissioning
5.2.2 Quick Start Menu
Important
After applying the control supply voltage for the first time, you will automatically be in the
quick start menu, which you must go through once to commission the soft starter for the
first time.
In the quick start menu, you need to enter the information needed to preset the
most important parameters of the soft starter for your application. Starting
parameters for typical types of applications are stored in the device parameters.
To achieve an optimum motor start, these parameters may need to be optimized
on the basis of the connected load using the "Settings" menu item, as described
in Chapter 5.4.3 "Specifying the Starting Mode".
If your particular load is not listed, select any load and optimize the defined
parameters, if necessary, using the "Settings" menu item as described in
Chapter 5.4.3 "Specifying the Starting Mode".
The values of the basic factory settings of the parameters, and the predefined
assignment of the control inputs and outputs, are listed in Chapter 10.3
"Technical Data".
Important
If you confirm the last item "Save settings - execute?" by entering "Yes" in the quick start
menu, you can only return to this menu by resetting the device back to its basic factory
settings (refer to "Restoring the factory settings" on Page5-40). This overwrites all
settings made up until that point.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Quick start menu
Language
1 English
2 Deutsch
3 Français
select
ESC
OK
Language
1 English
2 Deutsch
3 Français
select
ESC
OK
Application
1 Pumps
2 Fans
3 Compressors
select
ESC
OK
Rated operating
1current
Pump Ie
229.0 A
3
execute
ESC
OK
Starting time
10 s
10 s
execute
execute
ESC
OK
Current limiting
value
450 %
execute
ESC
OK
Function call
Save
settings
OK
ESC
OK
Save
settings
execute?
Yes
ESC
OK
SIEMENS
1mpe
2
3
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Figure 5-3: Quick start menu
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-7
Commissioning
5.3
User-specific Commissioning
If values are required that differ from the defined parameters in the quick start
menu or in the factory settings of the 3RW44, please proceed as follows:
Under the "Settings" menu item, select (refer to Chapter 5.3.1 "Main Menu Item
"Settings""):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select parameter set
Set motor data
Set starting mode and parameters
Set stopping mode and parameters
Set inputs and outputs
Check motor protection settings
Save settings
Notice
The setting is buffered in a Flash EPROM memory as soon as you change a setting in the
menu and execute it using the "OK" button. It is then active in the soft starter from this
moment onwards. When the control supply voltage is switched off, this value will be
canceled and the previous value restored. In order to permanently save the settings made
in the soft starter, you must save the data as described in Chapter 5.3.1 "Main Menu Item
"Settings"" and Chapter 5.4.14 "Saving Options".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.3.1 Main Menu Item "Settings"
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
9
Name
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
select
ESC
OK
10
Fieldbus
OK
3
Settings
select
ESC
OK
select
OK
OK
ESC
11
Saving
options
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
OK
select
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
select
ESC
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC
OK
4
Inputs
select
ESC
OK
5
Outputs
select
ESC
OK
6
Motor
protection
select
ESC
OK
7
Display
settings
select
ESC
OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-4: Main menu item "Settings"
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-9
Commissioning
5.4
Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set
5.4.1 Selecting the Parameter Set
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
OK
ESC
3
Stopping
settings
select
ESC
OK
4
Slow speed
Parameter
select
ESC
OK
Current limit
values
5
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-5: Select parameter set
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-10
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.2 Entering the Motor Data
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
0 ... Ie
(3RW44 device
name plate)
OK
1
Rated operating
current Ie
40.5 A
change
ESC
OK
2
0 ... 10,000 Nm
Rated operating
torque
143 Nm
change
ESC
OK
3
500 ... 3,600 min-1
Rated operating
speed
1470
change
ESC
OK
Function call
Copy motor data
to PS2+3
OK
ESC
OK
Copy motor data
to PS2+3
execute?
OK
ESC
OK
Figure 5-6: Entering the motor data and name plate
Rated operating
current Ie
Notice
Always set the rated operating current of the motor stated on the motor name plate based
on the prevailing line voltage. This setting is independent of the type of connection of the
soft starter (soft starter in standard or inside delta circuit). Value to be set in the above
example for a line voltage of 400 V, e.g. 40.5 A.
The motor current of the connected drive should be set to ensure proper functioning of the
soft starter during starting and stopping, as well as in regard to motor protection.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-11
Commissioning
Rated operating
torque
If the rated operating torque of the motor is not indicated on the name plate, it
can be calculated using the following formula:
1000
M = 9.55 × P × ------------n
Example
1000 9.55 × 22 kW × ---------------------------= 143 Nm
–1
1470 min
If no value is specified, the value of the basic factory setting is active (0 Nm).
When the start command is given and the motor is connected, the required value
is automatically calculated once by the soft starter.
Notice
If a motor with rated data (current, speed, torque) that differ from the values already
entered is connected to the soft starter (e.g. for testing purposes), these rated data must
be adapted to the new motor. If 0 Nm is entered as the rated operating torque, the value is
automatically calculated once by the soft starter.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-12
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.3 Specifying the Starting Mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
1
Voltage ramp
change
ESC
OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
4 M+curr. limiting
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
3 Torque control
4 M+curr. limiting
5 Direct on line
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
4 M+curr. limiting
5 Direct on line
6 Motor heating
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-7: Specifying the starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-13
Commissioning
"Voltage ramp" starting mode
SIEMENS
Voltage in %
3RW44
Menu
ESC
UMotor 100 %
OK
1
Display measured value
Breakaway voltage
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
Start voltage
3
Settings
select
Time (t)
s
Breakaway time
OK
OK
ESC
starting time
1
Parameter
set 1
100 % Voltage
at the motor
Maximum starting time
select
OK
ESC
4_1_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe.wmf
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
OK
Starting mode
1
Voltage ramp
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
2
Start voltage
40.0 %
change
ESC
OK
Starting time
0 ... 360 s
5
20 s
change
ESC
1 ... 1,000 s
OK
Maximum
starting time
deactivated
6
change
ESC
40 ... 100 %
OK
8
Breakaway
voltage
80 %
change
ESC
OK
Breakaway time9
0 ... 2,000 ms
0 ms
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-8: "Voltage ramp" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-14
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Voltage ramp with current limiting" starting mode"
SIEMENS
3RW44
Voltage in %
Menu
ESC
OK
UMotor 100 %
1
Display measured value
Breakaway voltage
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Start voltage
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
Time (t)
s
Breakaway time
starting time
1
Parameter
set 1
100 % Voltage
at the motor
Maximum starting time
select
OK
ESC
4_1_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe.wmf
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
Motor current
I
2
Starting
settings
I Direct
on-line
starting
motor
select
ESC
OK
Starting mode
Adjustable
from ... to
1
U+curr. limiting
change
ESC
OK
2
Start voltage
20 ... 100 %
40.0 %
change
ESC
0 ... 360 s
Beginning determined by specified
starting mode, in this
case breakaway pulse
starter
adjustable current
limit value
Beginning determined by specified
starting mode, in this
case voltage ramp
Ie Motor
OK
Starting time
I Soft
5
ne Motor
20 s
change
ESC
1 ... 1,000 s
Motor speed
n
OK
Maximum
starting time
deactivated
6
4_2_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe_mit_Strombegrenzung.wmf
change
ESC
125 ... 550 %
OK
Curr. limiting
value
450 %
7
change
ESC
40 ... 100 %
OK
8
Breakaway
voltage
80 %
change
ESC
0 ... 2,000 ms
OK
9
Breakaway
time
0 ms
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-9: "Voltage ramp with current limiting" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-15
Commissioning
"Torque control" starting mode
SIEMENS
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
1
Breakaway voltage
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
Limiting torque
MNom
select
ESC
OK
Start torque
3
Settings
Time (t)
s
select
OK
OK
ESC
Breakaway time
Starting time
1
Parameter
set 1
Maximum starting time
1 MDirect on-line starting
(maximum torque to be generated)
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
4_3_Drehmomentrampe.wmf
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
OK
Starting mode
1
Torque control
change
ESC
OK
3
Start torque
10 ... 100 %
50.0 %
change
ESC
20 ... 200 % *
OK
4
Limiting
torque
150 %
change
ESC
0 ... 360 s
OK
Starting time
5
20 s
change
ESC
1 ... 1,000 s
Limiting torque
*) Notice
In order to start the motor, the parameter value should be set to approx.
150 %. It should be high enough to ensure that the motor does not become
stuck during run-up. This ensures that enough acceleration torque is
generated throughout the entire motor run-up phase.
OK
Maximum
starting time
deactivated
6
change
OK
ESC
40 ... 100 %
8
Breakaway
voltage
80 %
change
OK
ESC
0 ... 2,000 ms
9
Breakaway
time
0 ms
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-10:"Torque control" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-16
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Torque control with current limiting" starting mode
SIEMENS
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
Breakaway voltage
OK
2
Status
display
Limiting torque
select
ESC
MNom
OK
3
Settings
Start torque
select
Time (t)
s
OK
OK
ESC
Breakaway time
1
Parameter
set 1
Starting time
Maximum starting time
select
1 MDirect on-line starting
(maximum torque to be generated)
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
4_3_Drehmomentrampe.wmf
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
OK
Starting mode 1
Motor current
I
M+curr. limiting
I Direct
change
Start torque
10 ... 100 %
3
50.0 %
change
ESC
20 ... 200 %
4
change
OK
Starting time
5
20 s
change
ESC
Beginning determined by specified
starting mode, in this
case torque control
Ie Motor
OK
6
Maximum
starting time
deactivated
change
ESC
125 ... 550 %
I Soft
starter
adjustable current
limit value
ESC
1 ... 1,000 s
Beginning determined by specified
starting mode, in this
case breakaway pulse
OK
Limiting
torque
150 %
0 ... 360 s
on-line
starting
motor
OK
ESC
OK
ne Motor
Motor speed
n
4_4_Drehmomentrampe_mit_Strombegrenzung.wmf
7
Current
limiting value
450 %
change
ESC
40 ... 100 %
OK
8
Breakaway
voltage
80 %
change
ESC
0 ... 2,000 ms
OK
9
Breakaway
time
0 ms
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-11: "Torque control with current limiting" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-17
Commissioning
"Direct on line
starting" starting
mode
Motor
torque
M
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
MDirect
1
Display measured value
on-line
starting
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
MNom
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
nNom
select
ESC
OK
OK
Motor speed
n
4_5_Menü_Startart_Direktstart_Drehmoment.wmf
1
Parameter
set 1
Motor current
I
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
IDirect
on-line
starting
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
Starting mode
1
Direct on line
INom
change
ESC
OK
nNom
Motor speed
n
001_Stromkurven_ohne_Sanftstarter.wmf
Figure 5-12:"Direct on line starting" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-18
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Motor heating" starting mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
Motor thermal capacity
Starting mode
Adjustable
from ... to
Motor heating
change
ESC
10 ... 100 %
1
OK
Motor thermal capacity
20 %
10
change
ESC
Caution
May lead to damage to property.
The "Motor heating" starting mode is not a continuous operating mode. The
motor must be equipped with a temperature sensor (Thermo click/PTC) to
ensure motor protection. The motor model with integrated electronic motor
overload protection is not suitable for this kind of operation.
OK
Figure 5-13:"Motor heating" starting mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-19
Commissioning
5.4.4 Specifying the Stopping Mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
Motor
speed
n
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
ne
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
3
1
2
OK
ESC
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
1 nCoasting down
3
Stopping
settings
2 nTorque-controlled
stopping mode
3 n
DC braking
select
ESC
Stop command
at soft starter
Time (t)
s
OK
OK
4_7_Auslaufart_allgemein.wmf
1
Stopping
mode
Coasting down
change
ESC
OK
OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC
OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC
OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC
OK
Stopping mode
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
4 DC braking
select
ESC
OK
Stopping mode
3 Pump stop
4 DC braking
5 Comb. braking
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-14:Specifying the stopping mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-20
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Coasting down" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
OK
ESC
3
Stopping
settings
select
ESC
OK
1
Stopping
mode
Coasting down
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-15:"Coasting down" stopping mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-21
Commissioning
"Torque control" stopping mode (soft stop)
SIEMENS
3RW44
Motor
torque
M
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
MNominal operation
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
Stopping torque
select
OK
OK
ESC
Stopping time
1
Parameter
set 1
Time (t)
s
Stop command
at soft starter
select
4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_Pumpenauslauf.wmf
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
1
Stopping
mode
Torque control
change
ESC
OK
Stopping time
0 ... 360 s
2
10 s
change
ESC
10 ... 100 %
OK
3
Stopping
torque
40.0 %
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-16:"Torque control" stopping mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-22
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Pump stop" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Motor
torque
M
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
MNominal operation
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
Stopping torque
select
OK
OK
ESC
Stopping time
Time (t)
s
1
Parameter
set 1
Stop command
at soft starter
select
4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_Pumpenauslauf.wmf
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
OK
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
1
Stopping
mode
Pump stop
change
ESC
OK
Stopping time
0 ... 360 s
2
10 s
change
ESC
10 ... 100 %
OK
3
Stopping
torque
40.0 %
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-17:"Pump stop" stopping mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-23
Commissioning
"DC braking" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
Motor
torque (M)
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
MNominal
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
Time (t)
s
3
Settings
DC braking torque
select
OK
OK
ESC
Stopping time
Motor braking
torque
1
Parameter
set 1
Stop command
at the
soft starter
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
5-24 DC braking stopping mode
select
OK
ESC
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
1
Stopping
mode
DC braking
change
ESC
OK
Stopping time
0 ... 360 s
2
10 s
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
Notice
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not possible in
inside delta circuits.
5
DC braking
torque
50 %
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-18: "DC braking" stopping mode
Note
If the "DC braking" function is selected, the "DC braking contactor" function must be
assigned to one output of the soft starter. This output must be used to control an external
braking contactor.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-24
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Combined braking" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Motor
torque
M
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
Stop command
at soft starter
select
ESC
MNominal operation
OK
2
Status
display
Stopping time
select
ESC
OK
Time (t)
s
3
Settings
select
DC braking torque
OK
OK
ESC
Dynamic
braking torque
1
Parameter
set 1
Motor
braking torque
select
OK
ESC
4_10_Menue_AuslaufartKombiniertes_Bremsen (2).wmf
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
OK
ESC
3
Stopping
settings
select
OK
ESC
Adjustable
from ... to
1
Stopping
mode
Comb. braking
change
ESC
0 ... 360 s
OK
Stopping time
2
10 s
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
Dynamic
braking torque
50 %
4
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
5
DC braking
torque
50 %
Notice
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not
possible in inside delta circuits.
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-19:"Combined braking" stopping mode
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-25
Commissioning
5.4.5 Setting Slow Speed Parameters
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
OK
ESC
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
ESC
OK
Slow speed
parameters
Adjustable
from ... to
3 ... 21
4
Slow-speed parameters
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
1
Slow speed
factor right
7
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
2
Slow speed
torque right
80.0 %
Note
To operate the motor with the specified slow speed parameters, the "Slow
speed" function must be assigned to one control input, and the "Motor
right PS1/2/3" or "Motor left PS1/2/3" function must at the same time be
assigned to the other. Also refer to the circuit suggestion in 9.1.7.
Directions of rotation:
Right: rotation in line phase direction
Left: rotation counter-clockwise to the line phase direction
change
ESC
3 ... 21
OK
3
Slow speed
factor left
7
change
ESC
20 ... 100 %
OK
4
Slow speed
torque left
80.0 %
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-20:Setting slow speed parameters
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-26
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.6 Specifying Current Limit Values
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
OK
ESC
1
Motor 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC
OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
4
Slow speed
parameters
select
ESC
OK
OK
Current limit
values
5
select
Adjustable
from ... to
19 ... 100 %
OK
OK
ESC
1
Minimum
current limit
19.0 %
deactivated from version *E09* V1.10.0
or 19 to 100 %
change
ESC
50 ... 150 %
OK
2
Maximum
current limit
113 %
deactivated from version *E09* V1.10.0
or 50 to 400 %
change
ESC
OK
Figure 5-21:Specifying current limit values
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-27
Commissioning
5.4.7 Parameterizing the Inputs
SIEMENS
3RW44
Note
An input action can only be
altered if the respective input is
inactive.
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
Notice
If the same action is assigned to two different inputs, both
of the inputs must also be operated in order to carry out
the selected function (e.g. to obtain logical "AND" linking
for a start command, assign the "Motor right PS1"
function to both input 1 and 2. A start command is only
accepted if both inputs are active).
OK
2
Status
display
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or
inherent device protection tripping, the action cannot be
acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until the
displayed cooling time has expired.
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
select
ESC
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC
OK
4
Inputs
Parameterization options for
control inputs 1 ... 4
select
ESC
OK
OK
1
Input 1 action
Motor right PS1
change
ESC
OK
2
Input 2 action
No action
change
ESC
OK
3
Input 3 action
No action
No action 1)
Manual operation local 2)
Emergency start 3)
Slow speed 4)
Quick stop 5)
Trip Reset 6)
Motor right parameter set 1 7)
Motor left parameter set 1 8)
Motor right parameter set 2 7)
Motor left parameter set 2 8)
Motor right parameter set 3 7)
Motor left parameter set 3 8)
change
ESC
OK
4
Input 4 action
Trip Reset
Explanation of the possible parameters:
1)
No action:
Input without function.
2)
Manual operation local:
When operated with PROFIBUS, the soft starter control can be
transmitted to the inputs by activating the input control. The
control function via PROFIBUS is deactivated during this time.
3) Emergency start:
Error: Current unbalance exceeded, thermal motor model
overload, temperature sensor open, temperature sensor short,
temperature sensor overload, maximum starting time exceeded,
current limit exceeded/undershot, ground fault detected,
impermissible le / CLASS setting: In the case of these faults, the
motor can be started via the emergency start function despite a
pending group error input. An emergency start action will be
assigned to one input, and, for example, "Motor right >
parameter set 1" assigned to another. The emergency start is
active as long as the input is activated. It can also be activated
during operation.
4) Slow speed:
The motor starts with the values set under the "Slow speed
parameters" menu item when the "Slow speed" input and the
"Motor right/left parameter set 1/2/3" input are activated at the
same time.
5)
Quickstop:
If the input is activated, a normal tripping with the currently set
stopping function is carried out (no group error appears). The
quickstop is carried out independently of the control priority.
6) Trip reset:
Pending faults can be acknowledged after rectification.
7) Motor right parameter set 1/2/3:
The motor starts (with rotation in line phase direction) and stops
with the values stored in the respective parameter set.
8) Motor left parameter set 1/2/3:
This function is active only when the "Slow speed" parameter is
active at the same time. The motor starts with the values stored
under the "Slow speed parameters" menu item (with rotation
counter-clockwise to the line phase direction).
change
ESC
OK
Note
The "Trip Reset" input is edge-triggered, the level change from 0 to 24 V DC is analyzed at the input. All other input
functions are analyzed on top of the already pending 24 V DC level.
Figure 5-22:Parameterizing the inputs
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-28
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.8 Parameterizing the Outputs
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
select
ESC
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC
OK
4
Inputs
select
ESC
OK
OK
5
Outputs
Parameterization options
for relay outputs 1 ... 3
select
ESC
OK
OK
Output 1 action
On-time motor
1
change
ESC
OK
2
Output 2 action
No action
change
ESC
OK
3
Output 3 action
No action
change
ESC
OK
No Action
PIO Output 1
PIO Output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Run up
Operation / bypass
Coasting down
On-time motor
Command motor-on
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Figure 5-23:Parameterizing the outputs
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-29
Commissioning
Status diagram of the outputs
Group error, bus error or device error occurs;
soft starter switches off and goes into error mode
Soft starter has detected
run-up
Control voltage at
terminal A1/A2
Ramp process of the
soft starter
Automatic restart
when reset
Soft starter has
detected run-up
Stop command
Start command
IN1 - IN4
Start command
Input 1input 4
Run up
Bypass
Operation
Stopping
Function output
On-time
Command
motor-on
Approx. 1s
delay
DC Braking
Power On
Group
warning 1)
Group
error 1)
Bus error
Device error
Ready to start
Warning / Error reset
command
error
Error occurs disappears
Warning pending
PAA 1
PAA 2
Warning pending
Error occurs
Warning / Error-reset command
error
disappears
Both of these output functions
can be directly controlled via
the optional Profibus.
ZustandAusgang.wmf
1) Note
Possible group warnings / group faults see Chapter 7.1.2 "Warnings and Group Errors".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-30
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.9 Selecting Motor Protection Settings
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
Adjustable
from ... to
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
1
Tripping
class
CLASS 10
change
OK
ESC
None; CLASS 5(10a);
CLASS 10; CLASS 15;
CLASS 20; CLASS 30
OK
3
Settings
Current asymmetry
limit value
40.0 %
select
2
30 ... 60 %
change
OK
OK
ESC
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
OK
Prewarning limit3
tripping reserve
200 s
select
ESC
OK
change
ESC
2
Parameter
set 2
OK
Prewarning limit4
motor heat build-up
80.0 %
select
ESC
OK
OK
5
Idle time
deactivated
select
ESC
OK
Inputs
5
Outputs
6
Motor
protecin
OK
OK
7
Yes; No
OK
Temperature
sensor
Deactivated
8
change
select
ESC
OK
change
ESC
OK
OK
OK
deactivated; 60 ... 1,800 s
Protection against
voltage failure
Yes
select
ESC
6
change
ESC
OK
OK
OK
Pre-charge
time
60 s
select
ESC
deactivated; 1 ... 100 s
change
ESC
4
0 ... 100 %
change
ESC
3
Parameter
set 3
0 ... 500 s
ESC
Deactivated
Thermo click
PTC-type A
OK
Figure 5-24:Selecting motor protection settings
Notice
In the case of heavy starting and set values of tripping class ³CLASS 20, we recommend setting the "Prewarning limit
tripping reserve" parameter value to 0 s (deactivated) and increasing the parameter "Prewarning limit motor heat buildup" to 95 %. Otherwise, a warning message regarding motor protection will be issued when starting.
Notice
If a CLASS setting other than 5(10a) or 10 is selected, it may be necessary to check and adjust the set values for the
rated operating current Ie of the motor (Chapter 5.4.2 "Entering the Motor Data") in all 3 parameter sets, since otherwise
the error message "Impermissible Ie/ CLASS settings" may be issued.
For the maximum permissible set value for the rated operating current Ie of the motor based on the CLASS settings,
please refer to Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data Power Unit".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-31
Commissioning
Notice
Use of the 3RW44 to operate motors in hazardous areas:
The 3RW44 does not have an ATEX certificate. When an ATEX-certified overload relay is
used (e.g. 3RB2 from Siemens), which affects an additional switching element
(e.g. contactor 3RT), the 3RW44 can be installed in series to this overload relay, meaning
that the ATEX requirements are met.
Important
The internal motor overload protection of the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter must be
deactivated for this kind of installation! (Set value under the menu item "Motor protection/
Tripping class": "None" and Motor protection/Temperature sensor: "Deactivated")
Circuit breaker /
fuse
3RB2
3RT
3RW
M 3~
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-32
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.10Selecting Display Settings
SIEMENS
Possible values
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
Deutsch
change
select
ESC
1
Language
1
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
OK
2
Contrast
0...100 %
50 %
select
ESC
change
OK
ESC
3
OK
3
Lighting
Settings
select
select
OK
OK
ESC
English
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Português
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
2
3
Parameter
set 3
6
deactivated
30...1,800 s
change
ESC
OK
Time: 10...250 ms
Speed: 10...100 %
OK
Activity monitoring time
30 s
select
ESC
5
select
ESC
OK
0...100 %
OK
Auto repeat
select
ESC
4
change
ESC
OK
Parameter
set 2
OK
Reaction time
keys
60 %
select
ESC
Brightness
Response to fault
Response to warning
OK
4
Inputs
select
ESC
OK
5
Outputs
select
ESC
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
select
ESC
OK
OK
7
Display
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
Figure 5-25:Selecting display settings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-33
Commissioning
5.4.11 Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
Possible values
select
ESC
OK
Overload - therm. 1
motor model
Tripping w/o restart
2
Status
display
change
select
ESC
ESC
OK
3
Settings
OK
Overload tem- 2
perature sensor
Tripping w/o restart
select
change
OK
OK
ESC
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
2
Parameter
set 2
3
Parameter
set 3
OK
5
Asymmetry
20 s
Warning
ESC
OK
4
Inputs
OK
Ground fault
6
Warning
ESC
OK
OK
5
Outputs
select
ESC
Warning *
Tripping
change
select
ESC
Warning
Tripping
change
select
ESC
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
change
ESC
OK
Warning
Tripping
OK
4
Overload
contact block
Tripping w/o restart
select
ESC
3
change
ESC
OK
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
Warning
OK
Current limit
value violation
Warning
select
ESC
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
Warning
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
*) Note
The ground fault function is only active after completion of
run up, not during starting.
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
7
Display
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-26:Specifying the behavior of the protective functions
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-34
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.12Specifying the Names on the Device Display
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
select
ESC
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC
OK
4
Inputs
select
OK
OK
ESC
5
Outputs
select
OK
OK
OK
ESC
6
Motor
protection
select
OK
OK
OK
ESC
7
Display
settings
select
OK
OK
OK
ESC
8
Response
to ...
select
OK
OK
OK
ESC
9
Name
select
ESC
OK
OK
1
Name
B S01-Z05
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-27:Specifying the names on the device display
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-35
Commissioning
5.4.13 Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP)
For information on activating the field bus interface, please refer to Chapter 8.4
"Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and
Setting the Station Address".
SIEMENS
3RW44
Fieldbus
interface
Menu
ESC
On
select
change
OK
ESC
Display measured value
1
OK
Group diagnosis
2
Disable
select
select
ESC
1
select
change
OK
ESC
Status
display
2
Response to
CPU master stop
3
Substitute value
select
select
ESC
OK
change
OK
ESC
Settings
OK
3
Station address
4
126
select
select
select
change
ESC
OK
ESC
Parameter
set 1
1
OK
Baud rate
5
12,000 kBd
select
select
ESC
OK
Saving
options
ESC
11
Substitute value
select
select
ESC
OK
Fieldbus
select
select
ESC
OK
6
select
select
ESC
10
OK
OK
Parameters disabled 7
CPU/Master
Off
select
change
ESC
OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting), the
parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values stored in the GSD file
or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the parameter must be set to
"On".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-36
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.14Saving Options
Specifying the saving options
SIEMENS
3RW44
Notice
As long as the connected drive is controlled by the soft starter, no
parameter changes carried out at the same time can be saved using the
"Saving options" menu item. This is only possible after the motor has
been shut off by the soft starter.
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
select
ESC
10
Fieldbus
OK
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
11
Saving
options
select
ESC
select
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
ESC
Function call
Save
settings
4
Inputs
OK
ESC
select
ESC
OK
OK
5
Outputs
OK
Function call
Restore
settings
OK
ESC
OK
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
Function call
Restore basic
factory settings
OK
select
ESC
ESC
OK
OK
OK
OK
7
Display
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
9
Name
select
ESC
OK
OK
Figure 5-28:Specifying the saving options
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-37
Commissioning
Save settings
Selected settings will be saved.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
select
ESC
10
Fieldbus
OK
ESC
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
11
Saving
options
select
ESC
select
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
ESC
Function call
Save
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
OK
4
Inputs
OK
OK
ESC
select
ESC
Save
settings
execute?
OK
OK
5
Outputs
Yes
ESC
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
SIEMENS
3RW44
select
ESC
OK
OK
Menu
OK
OK
OK
7
Display
settings
ESC
OK
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC
OK
OK
9
Name
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-29:Save settings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-38
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Restore settings
Selected settings which have not been saved will be discarded and the
previously saved settings will be restored.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
select
OK
2
Parameter
set 2
10
Fieldbus
ESC
OK
11
Saving
options
select
ESC
select
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
ESC
Function call
Save
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
OK
4
Inputs
ESC
select
ESC
Function call
Restore
settings
OK
OK
5
Outputs
OK
OK
OK
OK
ESC
select
ESC
Restore
settings
execute?
OK
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
Yes
select
ESC
ESC
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
7
Display
settings
SIEMENS
3RW44
select
ESC
Menu
OK
OK
OK
8
Response
to ...
ESC
OK
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
9
Name
select
ESC
OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-30:Restore settings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-39
Commissioning
Restoring the factory settings
All settings made or saved so far will be discarded and the device will be reset to
the basic factory settings (master reset). The quick-start menu must be executed
once again.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
Status
display
2
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
OK
ESC
1
Parameter
set 1
select
ESC
select
OK
ESC
2
Parameter
set 2
10
Fieldbus
OK
11
Saving
options
select
ESC
select
OK
3
Parameter
set 3
Function call
Settings
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
ESC
OK
OK
4
Inputs
OK
ESC
Function call
Restore
settings
select
ESC
OK
OK
5
Outputs
OK
OK
ESC
select
ESC
Function call
Restore basic
factory settings
OK
OK
OK
6
Motor
protection
OK
select
ESC
OK
OK
ESC
OK
OK
OK
Restore basic
factory settings
execute?
7
Display
settings
Yes
select
ESC
ESC
OK
OK
OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC
OK
OK
9
Name
Language
1 English
2 Deutsch
3 Français
select
select
ESC
OK
OK
ESC
OK
OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-31:Restoring factory settings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-40
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5
Other Device Functions
5.5.1 Display measured value
SIEMENS
3RW44
Note
When using the 3RW44 soft starter in an IT system with ground fault
monitoring: 3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUSDP
communication module must not be used in this network configuration.
3RW44 soft starters, from product version *E07* onwards, can be used in
combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However,
the phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (ULL) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured value display of the
3RW44.
Menu
ESC
OK
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
OK
1
Phase
voltages
select
ESC
OK
2
Phase-tophase voltages
Note
The "Phase currents" display always shows the currents in the supply
cable. This means that, if the soft starter is operated in the "Inside delta
circuit" circuit type, the currents measured internally by the soft starter are
extrapolated to the supply cable current (phase current) by a factor of 1.73
and displayed.
Due to asymmetries, the phase currents displayed in the inside delta
circuit may deviate from the currents that are actually running through the
supply cables.
select
ESC
OK
3
Blocking
voltages
select
ESC
OK
Phase currents
4
select
ESC
OK
5
Power
0W
Standard
ESC
OK
Line frequency6
0 Hz
Standard
ESC
OK
7
Supply
voltage
230 V
Standard
ESC
OK
Heatsink
temperature
22 °C
8
Standard
ESC
OK
9
Motor heat
build-up
0%
Standard
ESC
OK
10
Remaining time
for tripping
65540 s
Standard
ESC
OK
Function call
Switch off
standard display
OK
ESC
OK
OK
Switch off
standard display
execute?
Yes
ESC
OK
OK
Figure 5-32:Display measured value
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-41
Commissioning
5.5.2 Status Display
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
Device status
1
select
ESC
OK
Active
parameter set
2
Parameter set 1
Explanation of the messages:
select
ESC
OK
3
Type of
connection
Unknown/fault
Unknown/fault: No connected motor detected.
Star/delta: Soft starter connected in a standard circuit.
Inside delta: Soft starter connected in an inside delta circuit.
select
ESC
OK
4
Direction of
rotation
Unknown
Unknown: No line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
Right: Clockwise line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
Left: Counter-clockwise line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
change
ESC
OK
5
Inputs
select
ESC
OK
6
Outputs
Output
Output
Output
Output
1 - 3: Function corresponds to parameterization
4: Group error
5: Internal bypass contactor connected
6: Device fan activated
Standard
select
ESC
OK
Order number
7
3RW4435-6BC44
ESC
OK
8
Firmware
information
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-33:Status display
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-42
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.3 Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority)
SIEMENS
Notice
The "Standard control" menu item specifies which control device should be given
control priority when the control supply voltage is applied.
When the PROFIBUS communication module is activated, the setting is changed to
"Automatic/None".
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
Control device priority
Only a higher-priority control device can assume and hand over the control
priority (0 = lowest).
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
-
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
OK
ESC
Automatic operation (input control through PLC via PROFIBUS)
PC via PROFIBUS (Soft Starter ES software required)
Inputs
Via display keys
PC via serial interface (Soft Starter ES software required)
4
Motor
control
select
ESC
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Possible values
OK
Motor control
via keys
1
select
ESC
Activate key control?
Deactivate key control?
Execute control function
OK
Control motor
via inputs
2
Activate control via inputs?
Deactivate control via inputs?
select
ESC
OK
3
Standard
control
Inputs
change
ESC
Automatic / None
Inputs
Keys
OK
Figure 5-34:Motor control
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-43
Commissioning
5.5.4 Statistics
SIEMENS
3RW44
Notice
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with
firmware product version *E04* or higher. The firmware
product version is listed on the front of the device below the
petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only
be used in combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing
and diagnostics software. This menu item will be available in
the device display from 04/2006.
Menu
ESC
OK
Display measured value
1
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
ESC
OK
4
Motor
control
select
ESC
OK
5
Statistics
select
OK
ESC
1
Log lists
select
ESC
OK
2
Maximum
pointer
select
ESC
OK
3
Statistics
data
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-35:Statistics
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-44
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.4.1Log lists
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
ESC
OK
4
Motor
control
select
ESC
OK
5
Statistics
select
OK
ESC
1
Log lists
select
OK
ESC
Device errors
1
select
ESC
All device errors
are recorded and stored
OK
2
Trips
All group errors
are recorded and stored
select
ESC
OK
3
Events
All warnings and certain
actions are recorded and stored
select
ESC
OK
Notice
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version *E04* or
higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device below the petrolcolored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in combination with "Soft
Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software. This menu item will be available in
the device display from 04/2006.
Notice
Log lists cannot be deleted while the motor is running.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-45
Commissioning
5.5.4.2Maximum Pointer
(all minimum and maximum measured values are stored and displayed)
SIEMENS
3RW44
Notice
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version
*E04* or higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device
below the petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in
combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software.
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Settings
select
ESC
OK
4
Motor
control
select
ESC
5
Statistics
select
ESC
Standard
OK
ESC
7
Standard
select
ESC
OK
OK
Maximum line
frequency
0 Hz
2
Maximum
pointer
OK
Minimum line
frequency
0 Hz
1
Log lists
ESC
6
Number of
overload trips
0
8
Standard
select
ESC
OK
OK
ESC
Currents (%)
1
9
Max. cooling
temperature
0 °C
Standard
select
ESC
ESC
OK
Currents (rms) 2
OK
Max. contact element10
heat build-up
0%
Standard
select
ESC
ESC
OK
3
Phase-tophase voltages
select
ESC
OK
Function call
Reset all
maximum pointers
OK
ESC
OK
OK
Max. tripping
current IA (%)
0%
4
Reset all
maximum pointers
execute?
Yes
Standard
ESC
ESC
OK
OK
Max. tripping
current IA (rms)
0%
5
Standard
ESC
OK
Figure 5-36:Maximum pointer
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-46
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.4.3Statistics Data
SIEMENS
Notice
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version
*E04* or higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device
below the petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in
combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software.
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
OK
2
Status
display
select
ESC
OK
3
Operating hours 6
Motor
0 : 28 : 02
Settings
select
ESC
Standard
ESC
OK
4
Motor
control
OK
7
No. of starts
motor right
0
Note
Number of starts motor left, only possible in combination with
slow speed.
Standard
select
ESC
ESC
OK
OK
5
Statistics
8
No. of starts
motor left
0
Standard
ESC
select
OK
OK
ESC
Number of
overload trips
0%
1
Log lists
OK
9
Note
Number of stops with el. brake: The value is increased by one
when braking has been chosen as the stopping mode.
Standard
ESC
select
2
Maximum
pointer
OK
No. of stops
with el. brake
0
OK
ESC
10
Note
The value is increase by one when the output is activated.
Standard
ESC
select
ESC
3
Statistics
data
OK
11
No. of starts
Output 1
0
OK
Standard
ESC
select
OK
OK
ESC
Motor current
Imax (%)
0%
1
OK
12
No. of starts
Output 2
0
Standard
ESC
OK
Standard
ESC
OK
Motor current
Imax (rms)
0A
2
No. of starts
Output 3
0
13
Standard
ESC
OK
Standard
ESC
OK
Last trigger
current IA (%)
0%
3
No. of starts
Output 4
0
14
Standard
ESC
OK
Standard
ESC
OK
Last trigger
current IA (rms)
0A
4
Standard
ESC
OK
Operating hours 5
device
0 : 28 : 02
Note
The operating hours counter is activated as soon as control voltage is applied. Maximum
value displayed: 99999:59:59 hours
Standard
ESC
OK
Figure 5-37:Statistics data
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
5-47
Commissioning
5.5.5 Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection)
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
select
ESC
SIEMENS
OK
2
Status
display
3RW44
Menu
ESC
select
OK
ESC
OK
1
Display measured value
3
Settings
select
ESC
select
OK
ESC
2
Status
display
OK
4
Motor
control
select
ESC
select
OK
3
Settings
OK
ESC
5
Statistics
select
ESC
select
OK
ESC
4
Motor
control
OK
6
Safety
select
ESC
select
OK
OK
ESC
5
Statistics
1
Enter user
code
1000
select
ESC
change
OK
Safety
1000
OK
execute
1
Enter user
code
ESC
change
1
1001
execute
OK
2
User level
Customer write
ESC
OK
Enter user
code
1000
ESC
1
Enter user
code
select
ESC
OK
ESC
6
ESC
OK
2
User level
Customer
read only
OK
select
ESC
OK
Figure 5-38:Safety
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
5-48
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6
Device Functions
Chapter
Subject
Page
6.1
Various Parameter Sets
6-2
6.2
Starting Modes
6-3
6.2.1
Voltage Ramp
6-3
6.2.2
Torque Control
6-5
6.2.3
Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque
Control Starting Mode
6-7
6.2.4
Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque
Control Starting Mode
6-9
6.2.5
Starting Mode: Direct On Line
6-10
6.2.6
Starting Mode: Motor Heating
6-10
6.3
Stopping Modes
6-11
6.3.1
Coasting Down
6-11
6.3.2
Torque Control and Pump Stop
6-12
6.3.3
DC Braking / Combined Braking
6-13
6.4
Slow Speed Function
6-16
6.5
Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring
6-18
6.6
Motor Protection Functions
6-19
6.7
Inherent Protection
6-23
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-1
Device Functions
6.1
Various Parameter Sets
The soft starter provides three individually adjustable parameter sets. One
starting mode and stopping mode can be directly specified per parameter set.
Applications
• Starting Dahlander motors (variable-speed drive).
• Starting an application with different load conditions (e.g. empty or full
conveyor belt).
• Separate starting of up to three drives with different run-up behavior
(e.g. compressor and pump).
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2
Starting Modes
Different starting functions can be selected thanks to the large number of
applications for which the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be used. The motor
start can be set optimally according to application and deployment.
6.2.1 Voltage Ramp
The simplest type of soft start with the SIRIUS 3RW44 is achieved using a
voltage ramp. The terminal voltage of the motor is increased from a
parameterizable start voltage to line voltage within an adjustable starting time.
This starting mode is preset in the quick start menu.
Start voltage
The level of the start voltage determines the switch-on torque of the motor. A
smaller start voltage results in a smaller start torque and smaller starting current.
The start voltage should be high enough so that the motor starts immediately
and softly when the start command is sent to the soft starter.
Starting time
The length of the starting time determines the time in which the motor voltage is
increased from the set start voltage to the line voltage. This influences the
acceleration torque of the motor, which drives the load during the run-up
procedure. A longer starting time results in a smaller acceleration torque over
the motor run-up. This results in a longer and softer motor run-up. The length of
the starting time should be selected in such a way that the motor reaches its
nominal speed within this time. If this time is too short, i.e. if the starting time
ends before the motor has run up, an extremely high starting current will occur at
that moment, reaching the value of the direct starting current at this speed. The
soft starter can, in this case, switch itself off via the internal overload protection
function and go into fault mode.
Maximum starting
time
The "Maximum starting time" parameter can be used to determine the time after
which the drive must have completed its run-up. If the drive is not in nominal
operation upon completion of the set time, the starting procedure is aborted and
an error message is generated.
Internal run-up
recognition
The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor runup is recognized by the device, the internal bypass contacts close and the
thyristors are bridged. If this run-up recognition is performed before the set runup time is completed, the ramp is aborted and the motor voltage is immediately
increased to 100 % of the line voltage before the internal bypass contacts are
closed.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-3
Device Functions
Voltage in %
1
2
Parameterizable
start voltage
Time (t)
s
Parameterizable
starting time
100 %
Voltage at
the motor
1 Short starting time
5_01_Funktionsprinzip Spannungsrampe .wmf
UMotor100 %
2 Longer starting time
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
MDirect on-line starting
(maximum torque
that can be generated)
MNom
Parameterizable
start voltage
1
2
Acceleration
torque
3
Speed (n)
min-1
Parameterizable
torque starting time
1 MSoft start
Motor has run up and is
in nominal operation (nNom).
The runup is detected and the
bypass contacts close.
Short ramp time
2 M Soft start
Longer ramp time
5_02_Funktionsprinzip Spannungsrampe_Drehmomentverlauf.wmf
Figure 6-1: Function principle of voltage ramp
3 MLoad (e. g. Fan)
Figure 6-2: Function principle of voltage ramp / torque curve
Typical applications for voltage ramps
The voltage ramp function principle is suitable for all types of application.
If test runs with the application are carried out using motors that are smaller than
those to be used in the actual system, we recommend using the "Voltage ramp"
starting mode.
For machines requiring a breakaway pulse (inverse load response, e.g. in mills
or crushers), the breakaway pulse must be set as described in Chapter 6.2.3
"Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control
Starting Mode". The "Voltage ramp+current limiting (U+current limiting)" starting
mode is recommended for heavy starting.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.2 Torque Control
The motor speed and torque are calculated using the voltage and current r.m.s.
values, as well as the associated phase information between the line voltage and
the motor current (= cos ϕ = sensorless control), and the motor voltage is
controlled accordingly.
Torque control means that the torque generated in the motor is linearly increased
from a parameterizable start torque up to a parameterizable end torque within an
adjustable starting time.
The advantage over the voltage ramp is the improved mechanical run-up
behavior of the machine.
The soft starter controls the torque generated at the motor continuously and
linearly according to the set parameters until the motor has completely run up.
For optimum torque control during the starting procedure, the motor data of the
motor connected to the soft starter should be entered in the selected parameter
set using the menu item "Setting".
Start torque
The height of the start torque determines the switch-on torque of the motor. A
smaller start torque results in a smaller run-up torque and smaller starting
current. The start torque should be high enough so that the motor starts
immediately and softly when the start command is sent to the soft starter.
Limiting torque
The level of the limiting torque determines which maximum torque should be
generated in the motor during run-up. This value can thus also act as an
adjustable torque limitation.
In order to achieve a successful run-up, the parameter value should be set to
approx. 150 %. It should, however, be at least high enough so that the motor
does not get stuck during run-up. This ensures that enough acceleration torque
is generated throughout the entire motor run-up phase.
Starting time
The length of the starting time determines the time in which the start torque is
increased to the end torque.
A longer starting time results in a smaller acceleration torque over the motor runup. This results in a longer and softer motor run-up. The length of the starting
time should be selected in such a way that the motor accelerates softly until it
reaches its nominal speed.
If the starting time ends before the motor has completely run up, the torque is
limited to the set limiting torque until the soft starter recognizes the run-up
process and closes the internal bypass contacts.
Maximum starting
time
The "Maximum starting time" parameter can be used to determine the time after
which the drive must have completed its run-up. If the drive is not in nominal
operation upon completion of the set time, the starting procedure is aborted and
an error message is generated.
Internal run-up
recognition
The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor runup is recognized within the set starting time, the ramp will be aborted and the
motor voltage will immediately be increased to 100 % of the line voltage. The
internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-5
Device Functions
Note
The torque generated in the motor and controlled by the soft starter can at no
time be higher than the value of a similar direct on line start at the same speed.
Parameterizable
limiting torque
NNom
Parameterizable
start voltage
Acceleration
torque
Parameterizable
ramp time
Motor has run up and is
in nominal operation (nNom).
The runup is detected and the
bypass contacts close.
5_03_Funktionsprinzip Drehmomentregelung .wmf
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
Figure 6-3: Function principle of torque control
Typical applications for torque control
Torque control is suitable for all applications, especially in cases where a
consistent and smooth start is required. For machines requiring a breakaway
pulse (inverse load response, e.g. in mills or crushers), the breakaway pulse
must be set as described in Chapter 6.2.3 "Breakaway Pulse in Combination
with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode". The "Torque
control+current limiting (M+current limiting)" starting mode is recommended for
heavy starting (refer to Chapter 6.2.4 "Current Limiting in Combination with the
Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode").
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.3 Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode
This function is required for load machines with inverse torque behavior. Typical
applications are mills, crushers or drives with plain bearings. In such cases, it
may be necessary to create a breakaway pulse at the beginning of the machine's
start process. The breakaway pulse is set via the breakaway voltage and the
breakaway time. Using the breakaway pulse, the high limiting friction of the load
can be overcome and the machine can be set into motion.
The breakaway pulse can be used in combination with the voltage ramp, torque
control or current limiting starting modes, and is superimposed on these during
the set breakaway time.
The breakaway voltage setting determines height of the the breakaway torque to
be generated. Its maximum value can be 100 % of the start torque generated in
direct on line starting. The pulse should be at least high enough for the motor to
start immediately when the soft starter receives the start command.
Breakaway time
The breakaway time specifies how long the breakaway voltage should be
applied. Upon completion of the breakaway time, the soft starter finishes its runup process with the selected starting mode, e.g. voltage ramp or torque control.
The selected breakaway time should be at least long enough so that, after the
set time has elapsed, the motor does not remain stationary again but rather
directly continues to accelerate in the selected starting mode.
If 0 ms is set as the breakaway time (default), the breakaway pulse function is
deactivated.
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
1
Parameterizable
breakaway voltage
MNom
2
Parameterizable
start torque/
start voltage
Acceleration
torque
3
Time (t)
s
Parameterizable
breakaway voltage
1 MDirect on-line starting
Parameterizable
starting time
Motor has run up and is
in nominal operation (nNom).
The runup is detected and the
bypass contactsclose.
(maximum torque that can begenerated)
2 MSoft start
5_04_Funktionsprinzip Losbrechimpuls Drehmomentregelung .wmf
Breakaway voltage
Breakaway pulse combined with
torque regulation orvoltage ramp
3 MLoad (e. g. Crusher)
Figure 6-4: Function principle of breakaway pulse / torque control
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-7
Device Functions
Typical applications for breakaway pulses
Typical applications for breakaway pulses are load machines with inverse torque
behavior, e.g. crushers and mills.
Note
A breakaway pulse that is set too high may lead to the error message "Current
measurement range exceeded".
Remedy: Use larger starter dimensions or a lower breakaway voltage.
Only set the breakaway pulse when it is really required (e.g. for mills and
crushers).
A wrongly set breakaway pulse, e.g. for pumps, may lead to the error message
"Incorrect start conditions".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.4 Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode
The starter continuously measures the phase current (motor current) using the
integrated current transformer.
During motor run-up, it is possible to set a current limiting value on the soft
starter.
The current limiting can be activated if "Voltage ramp+current limiting" or "Torque
control+current limiting" has been selected as the starting mode and a value has
been entered in the relevant parameter.
During the starting procedure, the phase current is limited to the set value until it
falls below this value. A set breakaway pulse is superimposed on the current
limiting during the breakaway time.
Current limiting value
As a factor of the motor rated current, the current limiting value is set to the
maximum current required during the starting procedure. If the set current
limiting value is reached, the motor voltage is lowered (or regulated) by the soft
starter in such a way that the current will not exceed the set current limiting
value. The set current limiting value must be at least selected high enough for
enough torque to be created in the motor to bring the drive into rated operation.
A typical value can be 3 to 4 times the value of the rated operating current (Ie) of
the motor.
Run-up recognition
The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor runup is recognized, the motor voltage is immediately increased to 100 % of the line
voltage. The internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
Beginning determined
by specified starting
mode, in this case
breakaway pulse
Beginning determined
by specified starting
mode, in this case
voltage ramp
n
n
5_05_Strombegrenzung mit Sanftstarter.wmf
Motor current
Figure 6-5: Current limiting with soft starter
Typical applications for current limiting
Used in applications with a large centrifugal mass (mass reactance) and hence
long starting times, e.g. large fans, in order to lighten the load on the supply
network.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-9
Device Functions
6.2.5 Starting Mode: Direct On Line
If the "Direct on line" starting mode is set, the motor voltage is immediately
increased to line voltage when it receives the start command. This resembles the
starting behavior with a contactor, i.e. the starting current and start torque are
not limited.
Note
Due to the high starting current of the motor, the error "Current limit exceeded"
may occur in "Direct on line" starting mode. It may be necessary for the soft
starter to be dimensioned larger.
Run-up recognition
The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor runup is recognized, the internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are
bridged.
6.2.6 Starting Mode: Motor Heating
If IP54 motors are used outdoors, condensation occurs in the motor during
cooler periods (e.g. overnight or in the winter). This may lead to leakage currents
or short-circuits when the devices are switched on.
A pulsating DC current is fed into the motor winding to warm it up.
If the "Motor heating" starting mode is selected, a heating capacity can be
entered in the settings. This capacity should be chosen in such a way that the
motor will not be damaged. The setting range for the heating capacity extends
from 10 - 100 %. This corresponds to a motor current of approximately 5 - 30 %
of the motor rated current.
Typical applications for motor heating
Used for example in outdoor drives to minimize condensation inside the motor.
Caution
May lead to damage to property.
The motor heating starting mode is not a continuous operating mode. The motor
must be equipped with a temperature sensor (Thermo click/PTC) to ensure
motor protection. The motor model with integrated electronic motor overload
protection is not suitable for this kind of operation.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-10
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.3
Stopping Modes
Different stopping functions can be selected thanks to the large numbers of
applications for which the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be used. The motor
stop can be set optimally according to application and deployment.
If a start command is output during the stopping procedure, this procedure is
aborted and the motor is started up again using the specified starting mode.
Note
If guided stopping is selected as stopping mode (soft stop, pump stop or
braking), it may be necessary to select a larger dimensioned branch (soft starter,
wiring, branch protection elements and the motor), since the current exceeds the
rated motor current during the stopping procedure.
Motor
speed
n
3
1 nCoasting down
2 nTorque-controlled
stopping mode
3 n
DC braking
Stop command
at soft starter
1
2
Time (t)
s
4_7_Auslaufarten_allgemein.wmf
ne
Figure 6-6: Stopping modes in general
6.3.1 Coasting Down
Coasting down means that when the on command to the soft starter is removed,
the energy feed to the motor via the soft starter is interrupted. The motor will
coast down freely, only driven by the mass reactance (centrifugal mass) of the
rotor and the load. This is also referred to as a natural run-down. A larger
centrifugal mass means a longer coasting-down.
Typical applications for coasting down
Coasting down is used for loads with no special requirements in terms of
stopping behavior, e.g. large fans.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-11
Device Functions
6.3.2 Torque Control and Pump Stop
In "Torque-controlled stopping" and "Pump stop" mode, the coasting down /
natural run-down procedure of the load is extended. This function is set if abrupt
stopping of the load is to be prevented. This is typical in applications with small
mass reactances or high counter torques.
For optimum torque control during the stopping procedure, the motor data of the
motor connected to the soft starter should be entered in the selected parameter
set using the menu item "Setting".
Stopping time and
stopping torque
The "Stopping time" parameter of the soft starter can be used to specify for how
long power should be fed into the motor after removal of the on command. Within
this stopping time, the torque generated in the motor is continuously and linearly
reduced to the set stopping torque and the application is smoothly stopped.
Pump stop
In pump applications, so-called water hammers can occur if the drive is stopped
abruptly without using pump stop. These water hammers are caused by the
sudden stall and the accompanying pressure deviations in the pump. They
cause noise and a mechanical impact on the piping system, as well as on the
flaps and valves it contains.
MNominal operation
Stopping torque
Stopping time
Stop command
at soft starter
Time (t)
s
4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_
Pumpenauslauf.wmf
Motor
torque
M
Figure 6-7: Soft stop / pump stop
Typical applications for soft stop / pump stop
Use soft stop / pump stop
• in pumps to prevent water hammers.
• in conveyor belts to prevent materials from toppling.
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
For optimum motor protection, use a combination of electronic motor overload
protection and evaluation of a temperature sensor integrated into the motor.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-12
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.3.3 DC Braking / Combined Braking
In DC braking or combined braking, the coasting down / natural run-down of the
load is shortened.
The soft starter imposes a (pulsating) DC current in phases L1 and L3 on the
motor stator. This current creates a permanent magnetic field in the stator. Since
the rotor is still rotating due to its mass reactance, currents are induced into the
short-circuited rotor winding, creating a braking torque.
Notice
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not possible in inside
delta circuits.
Note
The pulsating DC current loads the network asymmetrically and the motor and
the branch must be dimensioned accordingly for the higher current load during
the stopping procedure. It may be necessary to overdimension the soft starter.
Note
Two braking versions are available:
Combined braking:
Use the combined braking function if applications with small mass reactances
(centrifugal masses) are to be stopped (J load ≤Jmotor). The real stopping time
can vary during braking processes when the combined braking function is
applied. Use the function DC braking if a braking time of uniform length is to be
achieved.
DC braking:
Use the DC braking function if applications with larger mass reactances
(centrifugal masses) are to be stopped (Jload ≤ 5 x Jmotor).
An external brake contactor is required for the DC braking function!
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
A combination of electronic motor overload protection and evaluation of a
temperature sensor integrated into the motor is recommended for optimum
motor protection.
Stopping mode: combined braking
If combined braking is selected, the dynamic braking torque, DC braking torque
and stopping time parameters can be set on the starter.
Dynamic braking
torque
The dynamic braking torque determines the extent of the braking effect at the
start of the braking process in order to reduce the speed of the motor. The
braking process is then continued using the DC braking function.
DC braking torque
The height of the DC braking torque determines the brake force of the motor.
If the motor accelerates again during DC braking, the dynamic braking torque
must be increased.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-13
Device Functions
Stopping time
The stopping time determines how long the braking torque should be applied to
the motor. The braking time should be long enough to bring the load to a
complete standstill.
To achieve a sufficient braking effect until standstill, the centrifugal mass (J) of
the load should not exceed that of the motor. The stopping time should be long
enough for the motor to come to a standstill. The soft starter has no standstill
recognition; if required, this must be accomplished using external measures.
Motor
torque
M
Stop command
at soft starter
MNominal operation
Stopping time
Time (t)
s
DC braking torque
Dynamic
braking torque
Motor
braking torque
4_10_Menue_AuslaufartKombiniertes_Bremsen (2).wmf
Note
The real stopping time can vary during braking processes when the combined
braking function is applied.
Figure 6-8: Combined braking
Stopping mode: DC braking
If the DC braking function is selected, the stopping time and DC braking torque
parameters can be set on the starter. With this braking type, one output of the
soft starter must be switched over to DC braking to control an external braking
contactor. Please refer to Chapter 9 for circuit suggestions.
The optimum parameters must be adjusted on the machine under appropriate
load conditions.
DC braking torque
The height of the DC braking torque determines the brake force of the motor.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-14
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
Stopping time
The stopping time determines how long the braking torque should be applied to
the motor. The braking time should be long enough to bring the load to a
complete standstill.
To achieve a sufficient braking effect until standstill, the load's mass moment of
inertia should not be higher than 5 times the motor's mass moment of inertia.
(Jload≤ 5 x Jmotor).
The soft starter has no standstill recognition; if required, this must be
accomplished using external measures.
Motor
torque (M)
MNominal
operation
Time
s
DC braking torque
Stopping time
Motor braking
torque
Stop command
at soft starter
Figure 6-9: DC braking
Typical applications for DC braking
Use "DC braking" in lathes (e.g. for tool changeover) and circular saws.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-15
Device Functions
6.4
Slow Speed Function
This function allows an asynchronous motor to be temporarily operated in both
directions at a speed that is lower than the rated operating speed.
The rated operating speed nmotor of the motor is determined by its line frequency
(f) and its number of pole pairs (p).
60
n Motor = f × -----p
A resulting slow speed frequency for the motor is defined by a specific thyristor
control. However, it is necessary for this function that only a reduced torque can
be generated in the motor. Due to the possibility of increased heating of the
motor, this function is not suitable for continuous operation.
The slow speed factor and the slow speed torque can be entered individually for
both directions of rotation.
Slow speed factor
By adjusting the slow speed factor, it is possible to control the motor with a
speed (nSlow speed) that is lower than the rated operating speed either in or
against the line phase direction.
n Nom
n Slow speed = ---------------------------------------------Slow speed factor
Slow speed torque
The torque generated in the motor can be influenced using the slow speed
torque. The maximum torque which can be created depends on the slow speed
torque that is set. 100 % slow torque can correspond to approx. 30 % of the
motor rated operating torque.
Line frequency
Resulting "slow speed frequency"
Figure 6-10:Slow speed function
Typical applications for slow speed function
This function is suitable for applications with a low counter torque, e.g. when
machine tools are positioned.
Note
In addition to the set parameters, the motor-specific properties and the
connected load also affect the speed resulting from the slow speed function and
the slow speed torque generated in the motor.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-16
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
Note
To control the motor with the specified slow speed parameters, "Slow speed"
must be assigned to one control input, and "Motor right PS1/2/3" or "Motor left
PS1/2/3" must be assigned to the other. Also refer to the circuit suggestion in
Chapter 9.1.7.
Directions of rotation:
Right: rotation in line phase direction
Left: rotation counter-clockwise to the line phase direction
Notice
Due to the reduced motor speed and the accompanying reduced self-cooling of
the motor, this operating mode is not recommended for continuous operation.
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
For optimum motor protection, use a combination of electronic motor overload
protection and evaluation of a temperature sensor integrated into the motor.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-17
Device Functions
6.5
Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring
It is possible to set minimum and maximum current limit values; if these are
exceeded or undershot, a message can be output.
Minimum current
limit value
The minimum current limit value can, for example, be used to indicate a V-belt
break and the corresponding no-load current of the motor, or when the fan filter
is clogged.
Maximum current
limit value
The maximum current limit value can be used to determine increased power loss
in the application, e.g. caused by storage damage.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-18
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.6
Motor Protection Functions
The motor overload protection is based on the motor winding temperature. This
temperature is used to determine whether the motor is overloaded or is
operating within its normal rating.
The winding temperature can either be calculated using the integrated
electronic motor overload function, or be measured using a connected motor
thermistor.
Both versions must be combined (=activated) in order to obtain so-called full
motor protection. This combination is recommended for optimum motor
protection.
Motor overload
protection
The current flow is measured during motor operation using current measurement
via converters in the soft starter. The temperature rise of the winding is
calculated on the basis of the configured rated operating current of the motor.
Depending on the set tripping class (CLASS setting) and protection parameters,
a warning or a trip is generated when the characteristic curve is reached.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-19
Device Functions
Tripping class
(electronic overload
protection)
The tripping class (CLASS) indicates the maximum tripping time in which a
protective device must trip at a value 7.2 times that of the rated operating current
in cold condition (motor protection acc. to IEC 60947). The tripping
characteristics indicate the tripping time in relation to the tripping current (refer
to Chapter 10.4 "Tripping Characteristics").
Different CLASS characteristics are available for normal or heavy starting.
Note
The rated data of the soft starters are based on normal starting (CLASS 10). For
heavy starting (> CLASS 10), it may be necessary to overdimension the soft
starter.
Current asymmetry
limit value
Three-phase asynchronous motors respond to slight line voltage asymmetries
with a higher asymmetrical current consumption. This increases the temperature
in the stator and rotor winding.
The asymmetric limit value is a percent value by which the motor current may
deviate in the individual phases.
The reference value for the evaluation is the maximum deviation from the
average value of the three phases.
Asymmetry is defined as a deviation of more than 40 % from the average value.
Prewarning limit
tripping reserve
If the set prewarning time limit is reached, which is based on the calculated time
until the motor is stopped by the motor protection function, a message can be
output.
Prewarning limit
motor heat build-up
A message can be generated if the set thermal prewarning limit of the motor is
reached. Tripping of the motor protection occurs at 100 %.
Idle time
The idle time is a specified time for the cooling behavior of the motor model after
a normal shutdown, i.e. not after overload trips.
After this period, the "Thermal motor model" of the motor starter is set to 50 % if
the motor heat build-up is still at > 50 %, otherwise it is set to 0 %.
This enables frequent start procedures (inching). Depending on the CLASS
settings, these lead to tripping where motor protection according to IEC 60947 is
used.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-20
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
The following graphic illustrates the cooling behavior with and without idle time:
Motor
On
Off
t
Motor
temp. rise
Without
Idle time
Tripping limit
υ
Overload trip
t
With
Idle time
υ
Tripping limit
No
Overload trip
Idle time
Idle time
t
Figure 6-11: Idle time
The idle time can be set between 1 and 100 s.
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
If the idle time is changed (0 = deactivated), motor protection according to
IEC 60947 (CLASS 10A, 10, 15, 20, 30) is no longer ensured. This means that
there will be no system protection in such cases. We recommend that parallel
protection measures be taken.
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
The motor must be designed for such inching operation, otherwise the overload
may cause permanent damage.
Pre-charge time
When the thermal motor model is tripped, a pre-charge time is started to let the
motor cool down; the motor is prevented from being restarted before the precharge time has elapsed.
Protection against
voltage failure
If protection against voltage failure is active and the control supply voltage
breaks down while a trip is pending, the current trip condition of the thermal
motor model and the current pre-charge time are stored in the soft starter. When
the control supply voltage returns, the trip condition of the thermal motor model
before voltage failure will be restored.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-21
Device Functions
Temperature sensor
The temperature sensor motor protection function measures the motor's stator
winding temperature directly using a measuring sensor in the motor, i.e. a motor
with a measuring sensor wound into the stator winding is required.
Two different types of measuring sensors are available for the evaluation.
• PTC type A thermistors ("Type A sensors")
• Thermo click
The wiring and the sensors are checked for wire breaks and short-circuits.
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or device protection
tripping, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until
the displayed cooling time has expired.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-22
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.7
Inherent Protection
The soft starter has integrated device protection to prevent the thyristors from
becoming thermally overloaded.
This is achieved via current measurement using converters in the three phases
and, additionally, by measuring the temperature with thermosensors at the
thyristor heatsink.
If a fixed warning threshold is exceeded, a message is generated by the soft
starter. If the fixed tripping value is exceeded, the soft starter switches off
automatically.
After a trip has occurred, a fixed 30-second pre-charge time must be observed
before the starter can be restarted.
If protection against voltage failure is active and the control supply voltage
breaks down while a trip is pending, the current trip condition of the thermal
motor model and the current pre-charge time are stored in the soft starter. When
the control supply voltage returns, the trip condition of the thermal inherent
protection before voltage failure will be restored.
In order to protect the thyristors from being destroyed by short-circuits (e. g. in
the event of cable damage or a shorted coil in the motor), SITOR semiconductor
fuses must be connected upstream. The corresponding selection tables can be
found in Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" and in
Chapter 10.3.8 "Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)".
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or device protection
tripping, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until
the displayed cooling time has expired.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6-23
Device Functions
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
6-24
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7
Diagnosis and Messages
Chapter
Subject
Page
7.1
Diagnosis, Messages
7-2
7.1.1
Status Messages
7-2
7.1.2
Warnings and Group Errors
7-2
7.1.3
Device Errors
7-7
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7-1
Diagnosis and Messages
7.1
Diagnosis, Messages
7.1.1 Status Messages
Message
Cause / Remedy
Checking voltage
Main voltage not yet applied.
Checking line phases
Option 1: Main voltage is applied but the motor has not yet been connected or has been incorrectly connected.
Option 2: The motor is properly connected but there is no phase voltage.
Ready to start
Device is ready to start (main voltage is applied and the motor is properly connected).
The motor will start as soon as a start command is received.
Start mode active
Motor is started in the set starting mode.
Motor running
Device is in bridging mode (bypass contactor). Starting completed.
Stopping mode active
Motor is stopped using the set stopping mode.
Cooling time of the motor is active
(for product version < *E06*
devices)
After overload tripping of the thermal motor model, it is impossible to start the motor for a defined period of time
(parameter: pre-charge time) to ensure that the motor can cool down.
Contact block cooling time
(for product version < *E06*
devices)
After overload tripping of the inherent protection, it is impossible to start the motor for 30 s to allow the device to
cool down.
Emergency start is active
The emergency start function is activated.
Quickstop active
The quickstop function is activated.
Error with restart
Error without restart
Message
Warning
7.1.2 Warnings and Group Errors
Cause / Remedy
No line voltage
x
1. Start command output even though the main voltage has not yet been applied.
Remedy: Switch on line voltage.
2. If this message is issued in bypass operation, it may have been mistakenly issued because
one of the following messages was generated too often: "Prewarning Limit Motor Heat
Build-Up", "Remaining Time for Tripping" or "Current limit exceeded/undershot" (can also
be traced via the entries in Log list / Events).
Remedy: See the description of the respective messages
Incorrect start conditions (for product
version < *E04* devices)
x
1. Error occurs without motor starting.
Cause:
- Motor has not been connected correctly.
- Inside delta circuit incorrectly configured.
- Ground fault present.
Remedy: Check and rectify wiring (see inside delta circuit wiring suggestions).
2. Error occurs during starting.
Cause:
- Start voltage too high
- Breakaway pulse set (incorrectly): instable motor start
(Only set breakaway pulse if absolutely necessary. In the case of pumps, for example, a
breakaway pulse can often cause misfiring.)
If there is an idle time of < 5 s since the last start, the 3RW44 starts with a higher start
voltage. In combination with a set breakaway pulse, this can lead to "Incorrect start
conditions".
Remedy: Adjust parameters or increase idle time.
Phase angle control failure (for product
version ≥*E04* devices)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
7-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Loss of phase L1
x
Error with restart
Error without restart
Message
Warning
Diagnosis and Messages
Cause / Remedy
Option 1:Phase L1 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
A trip occurs due to a voltage drop in the permissible rated operational voltage of >15 %
>100 ms during starting, or >200 ms in bypass operation.
Remedy: Connect L1 or rectify voltage drop.
Option 2: The connected motor is too small and the error message is issued immediately
after switching to bridging mode.
Remedy: Set rated operating current for connected motor correctly or set to minimum (if
motor current is lower than 10 % of the set Ie, the motor cannot be operated with this
starter).
Option 3: Starter used in IT system with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must not
be used in this network configuration.
Remedy: Replace starter with 3RW44, product version ≥ *E07*. This version can be used
in combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However, the phase
voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed
incorrectly on the measured value display of the 3RW44.
Loss of phase L2
x
Option 1: Phase L2 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
A trip occurs due to a voltage drop in the permissible rated operational voltage of >15 %
>100 ms during starting, or >200 ms in bypass operation.
Remedy: Connect L2 or rectify voltage drop.
Option 2: The connected motor is too small and the error message is issued immediately
after switching to bridging mode.
Remedy: Set rated operating current for connected motor correctly or set to minimum (if
motor current is lower than 10 % of the configured Ie, the motor cannot be operated with
this starter).
Option 3: Starter used in IT system with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must
not be used in this network configuration.
Remedy: Replace starter with 3RW44, product version ≥ *E07*. This version can be used
in combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However, the phase
voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed
incorrectly on the measured value display of the 3RW44.
Loss of phase L3
x
Option 1: Phase L3 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
A trip occurs due to a voltage drop in the permissible rated operational voltage of >15 %
>100 ms during starting, or >200 ms in bypass operation.
Remedy: Connect L3 or rectify voltage drop.
Option 2: The motor that is connected is too small and the error message is issued
immediately after switching to bridging mode.
Remedy: Set rated operating current for connected motor correctly or set to minimum (if
motor current is lower than 10 % of the configured Ie, the motor cannot be operated with
this starter).
Option 3: Starter used in IT system with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must not
be used in this network configuration.
Remedy: Replace starter with 3RW44, product version ≥ *E07*. This version can be used
in combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However, the phase
voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed
incorrectly on the measured value display of the 3RW44.
Missing load phase T1
x
Motor phase T1 is not connected.
Remedy: Connect motor correctly.
Missing load phase T2
x
Motor phase T2 is not connected.
Remedy: Connect motor correctly.
Missing load phase T3
x
Motor phase T3 is not connected.
Remedy: Connect motor correctly.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7-3
Error with restart
Error without restart
Message
Warning
Diagnosis and Messages
Cause / Remedy
Supply voltage below 75 %
x
Control supply voltage is below 75 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than
100 ms (voltage failure, voltage drop, wrong control supply voltage).
Remedy: Check control supply voltage.
Supply voltage below 85 %
x
Control supply voltage is below 85 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than 2 s
(voltage failure, voltage drop).
Remedy: Check control supply voltage.
Supply voltage above 110 %
x
Control supply voltage is above 110 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than 2 s
(voltage peaks, wrong control supply voltage).
Remedy: Check control supply voltage.
Phase currents are asymmetric (asymmetric load). Message is output when the asymmetry
is greater than the set limit (parameter: Current asymmetry limit value).
Remedy: Check load or change parameter value.
Current unbalance exceeded
x
x
Thermal motor model overload
x
x
x
The thermal motor model has tripped. After an overload trip, restarting is blocked until the
pre-charge time has elapsed.
Remedy in the case of unwanted tripping:
- Check whether the motor rated operating current Ie is incorrectly set or
- Change CLASS setting or
- Reduce switching frequency, or
- Deactivate motor protection (CLASS OFF)
Prewarning limit motor heat build-up
x
Motor heat build-up is greater than the parameter value for: Prewarning limit motor heat
build-up. The thermal motor model approaches an overload trip, depending on the set
value. For heavy starting and set values of tripping class ≥CLASS 20, we recommend
increasing the "Prewarning Limit Motor Heat Build-Up" parameter value to 95 %.
Remaining time for tripping undershot
x
Time until overload tripping of the thermal motor model is shorter than the set value for the
"Prewarning limit remaining time for tripping" parameter.
For heavy starting and set values of tripping class ≥ CLASS 20, we recommend increasing
the "Prewarning limit tripping reserve" parameter value to 0 s (deactivated).
Line overvoltage (for product version <
*E04* devices)
x
Applied 3-phase line voltage is not suitable for the device or longer voltage peaks occur.
Tripping occurs due to the permitted rated voltage being exceeded by >10 % >500 ms.
From product version *E02* upwards, the internal tripping limit has been increased to
>18 % >2000 ms.
Remedy: Apply correct voltage.
Current range exceeded
x
1. A very high current has occurred (beyond the measuring range of the current transformers
integrated in the soft starter). This may happen in the case of: direct on line starting,
breakaway pulses or combined braking.
Remedy: If the "Voltage ramp"” starting mode is selected, extend the set ramp time or
lower the breakaway voltage or braking torque. The soft starter may be dimensioned too
small for the motor.
2. If this message is issued during start-up, it may have been mistakenly issued because one
of the following messages was generated too often: "Prewarning limit motor heat build-up",
"Remaining time for tripping" or "Current limit exceeded/undershot" (can also be traced via
the entries in Log list / Events).
Remedy: Refer to the description of the respective messages.
Motor stalled - switched off
(for product version < *E07* devices
only)
x
A very high current suddenly occurs in bridging mode, e.g. when the motor stalls (I >
4 x IeMotor higher than 100 ms).
Remedy: Check motor.
Overcurrent
(for product version < *E07* devices
only)
x
A current of more than 6 times the rated operating current has occurred for a long period of
time.
Remedy: Activate current limiting or check dimensioning (device/motor).
Power unit overheated
x
Line voltage too high (for product
version ≥*E04* devices)
x
Overload trip of the thermal model for the power unit.
Remedy: Wait until the device has cooled down, perhaps set a lower current limit or
reduce the switching frequency (too many starts in succession).
Check whether the motor is blocked or the ambient temperature is too high in the vicinity of
the soft starter (for derating above 40 °C, refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data").
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
7-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Error with restart
Message
Warning
Error without restart
Diagnosis and Messages
Power unit overtemperature
x
Temperature sensor short-circuit
x
x
x
Temperature sensor is short-circuited at terminals T1 / T2.
Remedy: Check temperature sensor.
Temperature sensor open
x
x
x
Temperature sensor faulty at terminals T1 / T2, one line is not connected or no sensor is
connected at all.
Remedy: Check temperature sensor or, if none is connected: deactivate temperature
sensor.
Temperature sensor overload
x
x
x
Temperature sensor has tripped at terminals T1 / T2, motor overheated.
Remedy: Wait until the motor has cooled down and, if necessary, check motor.
Max. starting time exceeded
Cause / Remedy
The temperature of the thermal model for the power unit is higher than the permissible
temperature for continuous operation.
Remedy: Check the motor operating current or check if the ambient temperature is too
high in the vicinity of the soft starter (for derating above 40 °C, refer to Chapter 10.3
"Technical Data").
x
The set maximum starting time is shorter than the actual run-up time of the motor.
Remedy: Extend "Max. starting time" parameter, increase current limiting value or check
load connected to the motor for mechanical faults.
Current limit exceeded / undershot
x
x
Set current limit has been exceeded or undershot, e.g. due to a clogged fan filter or by the
motor stalling.
Remedy: Check the motor / load for the reason for the current limit value violation, or
adjust the limit value according to the existing load conditions.
Ground fault detected
x
x
One phase is connected to ground (only possible in bypass operation).
Remedy: Check connections and wiring.
Manual operation local connection
break
x
Connection to the PC has been interrupted (if PC-controlled) or (if motor is key-controlled)
no key has been pressed for a long period of time (see Settings > Display > Activity
monitoring time in Chapter 5.4.10).
Control will be handed over to the inputs if these have requested control priority.
Remedy: Reconnect the PC or increase activity monitoring time and press a key at regular
intervals.
Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings
x
The set rated operating current Ie of the motor (Chapter 5.4.2 "Entering the Motor Data")
exceeds in at least one of the three parameter sets the corresponding, maximum
permissible set current, based on the selected CLASS settings (Chapter 5.4.9 "Selecting
Motor Protection Settings"). In product version ≥ *E07* devices, the corresponding
parameter set (PS) in which the incorrect value is to be found will be displayed
For maximum permissible adjustable values, please refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical
Data".
If the soft starter is connected in an inside delta circuit, the motor feeder may have been
incorrectly wired (Chapter 9.1.5 "3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit"), so that the "Status
display / Type of connection" menu item (Chapter 5.5.2 "Status Display") shows
"Unknown / fault".
Remedy: Check the set rated operating current of the motor in all 3 parameter sets,
reduce the CLASS setting or overdimension the soft starter. In the case of inside delta
circuits, check the wiring of the motor feeder to ensure that it corresponds to the specified
circuit diagrams.
If the motor is not activated, this is only a status message. However, the message
becomes an error without restart once a start command is issued.
No external start parameters received
(for product version ≥ *E06* devices)
x
Only when operated with PROFIBUS DP. Incorrect or non-permissible parameter values
have been sent by the PLC.
Remedy: The incorrect parameter can be read out and corrected to a permissible value via
the Soft Starter ES software.
PIO error (for product version ≥ *E06*
devices)
x
PIO error (process image of the outputs faulty) is displayed:
• If Motor right and Motor left have been simultaneously selected (Cause 1) or
• parameter set 4 has been selected via the PLC (Cause 2).
Remedy:
• Automatic deletion once Motor right and Motor left are deactivated again (for Cause 1),
or
• a valid parameter set (PS 1-3) is set (for Cause 2).
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7-5
Bypass element protective tripping (for
product version ≥ *E07* devices)
x
Error with restart
Error without restart
Message
Warning
Diagnosis and Messages
Cause / Remedy
A very high current occurs in bridging mode. Tripping depends on the time and strength of
the current. The error can only be reset after 30 s (cooling).
Remedy: Check the motor and the soft starter dimensioning.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
7-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Diagnosis and Messages
7.1.3 Device Errors
Message
Cause / Remedy
Contact element damaged (for
product version ≥*E04* devices)
At least one bypass element is welded and/or at least one thyristor has shorted. This message is generated when
the control supply voltage is applied and the current flow is being measured (via the soft starter), but no start
command has been issued. 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance (see Chapter “Important Notes”)
Switching element 1 failed
Thyristor in phase L1 has shorted. (This message is displayed when the start command is issued.) 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Switching element 2 failed
Thyristor in phase L2 has shorted. (This message is displayed when the start command is issued.) 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Switching element 3 failed
Thyristor in phase L3 has shorted. (This message is displayed when the start command is issued.) 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Flash memory error
The device memory is faulty.
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Device not identified
Device has not yet been identified. It must be given identification data.
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Versions not matching
The version does not match the firmware.
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Bypass element fault
The bypass contactor is welded or defective.
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Heatsink thermistor open
Option 1: The temperature sensor on the heatsink of the starter is not connected or is defective.
Option 2: 3RW4465 or 3RW4466 may have a defective fan on the front of the starter.
Remedy: For 3RW4465 and 3RW4466 only: Try to rectify the fault after a cooling time of approx. 30 to 60 minutes
by switching the control supply voltage off and then on again. If successful, check whether the fan on the front of
the soft starter runs when a start command is issued. If not, it may be necessary to replace the fan. (The fan on the
front of the starter and the fan on the bottom of the device must both be running in fault-free operation).
For all 3RW44 starters:
If switching the control supply voltage off and on again does not cause the error message to reset, contact your
SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Heatsink thermistor short
The temperature sensor on the heatsink of the starter is defective.
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Note
Some error messages may be incorrect (e.g. Loss of phase L1, although L2 is
missing).
Note
When using the 3RW44 soft starter in an IT system with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module
must not be used in this network configuration. 3RW44 soft starters from product
version *E07* onwards can be used in combination with the PROFIBUS DP
communication module. However, phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-tophase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured
value display of the 3RW44.
1) Possible ohmic value for a defective thyristor: <2 kOhm (L-T).
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7-7
Diagnosis and Messages
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
7-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Chapter
Subject
8
Page
8.1
Introduction
8-4
8.1.1
Definitions
8-5
8.2
Data Transmission
8-6
8.2.1
Data Transmission Options
8-6
8.2.2
Communication Principle
8-6
8.3
Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8-7
8.3.1
Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field
Bus Interface)
8-7
8.4
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus
Interface) and Setting the Station Address
8-9
8.4.1
Introduction
8-9
8.4.2
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the
Display, Setting the Station Address and Saving the Settings
8-10
8.4.3
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus
Interface) and Setting the Station Address via the Device
Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter
ES + SP1" Software
8-13
8.5
Soft Starter Configuration
8-15
8.5.1
Introduction
8-15
8.5.2
Configuration with the GSD File
8-15
8.5.3
Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software
8-16
8.5.4
Diagnostics Package
8-16
8.5.5
Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software
8-16
8.6
PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7
(Example)
8-17
8.6.1
Introduction
8-17
8.6.2
Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7
8-19
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-1
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Chapter
Subject
Page
8.6.3
Integration into the User Program
8-21
8.6.4
Switching On
8-21
8.6.5
Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter
8-22
8.7
Process Data and Process Images
8-23
8.8
Diagnosis via LED Display
8-25
8.9
Diagnosis with STEP 7
8-26
8.9.1
Reading the Diagnosis
8-26
8.9.2
Options for Reading the Diagnosis
8-26
8.9.3
Structure of the Slave Diagnosis
8-27
8.9.4
Station Status 1 to 3
8-28
8.9.5
Master PROFIBUS Address
8-30
8.9.6
Manufacturer Code
8-30
8.9.7
Code-Based Diagnosis
8-31
8.9.8
Module Status
8-32
8.9.9
Channel-Based Diagnosis
8-33
8.10
Data Formats and Data Sets
8-35
8.10.1
Characteristics
8-35
8.11
Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes
8-38
8.11.1
Identification Number (ID No.)
8-38
8.11.2
Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement
8-38
8.12
Data Sets
8-40
8.12.1
Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs
8-41
8.12.2
Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs
8-42
8.12.3
Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors
8-43
8.12.4
Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings
8-44
8.12.5
Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events
8-44
8.12.6
Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131
8-48
8.12.7
Data Set 82 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 132
8-48
8.12.8
Data Set 83 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 133
8-48
8.12.9
Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis
8-49
8.12.10 Data Set 93 - Writing a Command
8-55
8.12.11
8-56
Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values
8.12.12 Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data
8-57
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Chapter
Subject
Page
8.12.13 Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer
8-58
8.12.14 Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification
8-44
8.12.15 Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/
Writing Set 1, 2, 3
8-46
8.12.16 Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/
Writing Set 1, 2, 3
8-48
8.12.17 Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module
8-67
8.12.18 Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters
8-68
8.12.19 Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments
8-69
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-3
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.1
Introduction
This chapter describes the PROFIBUS DP communication module for the
3RW44 soft starter.
Using the PROFIBUS DP communication module, the 3RW44 soft starter can be
linked to the Profibus branch with all its functionality.
Prerequisites
• You have configured an infeed module with integrated S7 station
e.g. with CPU315-2 DP.
• STEP 7 (V 5.1 and higher + Hotfix 2) is completely installed on your PC/PD.
• You are proficient in STEP 7.
• The PD is connected to the DP master.
Notice
The PROFIBUS DP communication module only works with 3RW44 devices of
product version "E06" or higher, implemented for devices from production date
060501 onwards.
Production location / Year / Month / Day Product version
Notice
IT systems with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version ≤ *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication
module must not be used in this network configuration. 3RW44 soft starters as of
product version *E07* can be used in combination with the PROFIBUS DP
communication module. However, phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-tophase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured
value display of the 3RW44.
Notice
For 3RW44 PROFIBUS DP communication module, product version ≤ *E03*:
Use of the 3RW44 with PROFIBUS for redundant controls and Y link:
The 3RW44 acts like a DPV0 Slave in the Y link. Parameterization can only be
carried out via the GSD file. Only cyclic data is transmitted, no data sets or
alarms.
For 3RW44 PROFIBUS DP communication module from product version *E04*
onwards: From this version onwards, DPV1 operation (read, write data set and
alarms) is also possible downstream from a Y link.
Further PROFIBUS DP documentation
Operating instructions "PROFIBUS DP Communication Module for 3RW44 Soft
Starters", order number: 3ZX1012-0RW44-0KA0.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.1.1 Definitions
S7 slave
An S7 slave is a slave fully integrated into STEP 7. It is embedded via OM Soft
Starter ES. It supports the S7 model (diagnosis alarms).
Writing data
Writing data means that data are transmitted to the soft starter.
Reading data
Reading data means that data are transmitted from the soft starter.
GSD
The device master file (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a uniform format.
Use of the GSD simplifies the configuration of the DP master and the DP slave.
See "Configuration with the GSD File" on Page 8-15.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-5
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.2
Data Transmission
8.2.1 Data Transmission Options
The following figure illustrates the data transmission options:
Master class 2
PC or PD with
Soft Starter ES
Master class 1
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communications processor
Max. two master class
2 possible.
Data transmission to master
class 1.
PROFIBUS DPV1 extension of the standard:
Parameterization,
diagnosis, controlling, signaling, testing via
PROFIBUS DPV1
PC / PD e.g. with Soft Starter ES or
Soft Starter ES Premium
Parameterization, diagnosis, controlling, signaling,
testing via system interface
Figure 8-12:Data transmission options
8.2.2 Communication Principle
The following figure illustrates the communication principle, in which different
data are transmitted depending on the operating modes of the master and slave:
Master Class 1
cyclic I/O
Master Class 2 (Max.2)
PLC-CPU
acyclic
acyclic
Acyclic
PC or PCS
e. g.
Soft Starter ES
Professional
PLC
Communications processor
Configuration
GSD
Disable
starting
parameters
Sirius 3RW44 Soft Starter
Diagnosis
3RW44
Alarms
Parameter
Data sets
Data sets
DPV0
Cycl. signaling data
Cycl. control data
DPV1
DPV1
Figure 8-13:Communication principle
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.3
Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burns. Before
starting work, de-energize the system or device.
Observe the information in the operating instructions "PROFIBUS DP
communication module for 3RW44 Soft Starters", order number 3ZX10120RW44-0KA0.
8.3.1 Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface)
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
Before inserting the PROFIBUS DP communication module, de-energize the
3RW44 soft starter.
Notice
The PROFIBUS DP communication module only works with 3RW44 devices of
product version "E06" or higher, implemented for devices from production date
060501 onwards.
Production location / Year / Month / Day Product version
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-7
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
RW-01181
Insert a small screwdriver into the
opening in the cover of the 3RW44 soft
starter (1). Lightly press the screwdriver
downwards (2) and remove the cover
(3).
3
3
1
2
Insert the PROFIBUS DP
communication module into the device
(4).
RW-01182
Screw the PROFIBUS DP
communication module into place using
the screws included in the scope of
supply (5).
4
5
6
5
Plug the PROFIBUS connecting cable
into the socket of the communication
module (6). Screw the PROFIBUS
connecting cable firmly into place.
Switch on the supply voltage.
The "BUS" LED blinks yellow. This
means that the communication module
has been inserted correctly, but has not
yet been activated.
0.8 ... 1.2 Nm
7 ... 10.3 lbf· in
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.4
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field
Bus Interface) and Setting the Station Address
8.4.1 Introduction
Activate the PROFIBUS DP communication module (device function "Field bus")
and set the station address either via the display or via the device interface using
the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter ES + SP1" software.
Notice
After the communication module has been activated, the control priority
automatically switches from the inputs to the PROFIBUS DP communication
module.
If an input is active with the "Manual operation local" function, the control priority
does not change (refer to Chapter 5.4.7 "Parameterizing the Inputs" on Page 528).
The station address of the soft starters is pre-set to 126 as the factory default.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-9
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.4.2
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the Display, Setting the Station
Address and Saving the Settings
1. When putting the soft starter into operation for the first time, you have to go
through the quick start menu (refer to Chapter 5.2). Also refer to the operating
instructions "3RW44 Soft Starters" (order number: 3ZX1012-0RW44-0AA0).
2. Press the respectively marked key on the device.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Fieldbus
interface
Menu
ESC
Off
select
change
OK
Display measured value
ESC
1
OK
Fieldbus interface
1 Off
2 On
select
select
ESC
1
select
select
OK
Status
display
2
ESC
select
select
ESC
OK
Fieldbus interface
1 Off
2 On
select
select
OK
Settings
3
ESC
Fieldbus
interface
select
select
ESC
OK
1
On
OK
select
change
Parameter
set 1
1
ESC
OK
select
select
ESC
OK
Saving
options
11
select
select
ESC
OK
Fieldbus
10
select
select
ESC
OK
3. The "BUS" LED blinks red.
4. When the PROFIBUS icon
appears on the display, the PROFIBUS DP
communication module has been activated successfully.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-10
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
The next step is to set the desired station address for the 3RW44 as a
PROFIBUS slave.
In this example, the station address is set to "23".
Fieldbus
interface
Parameterization options
1
On, Off
On
select
change
ESC
OK
Group diagnosis
2
Disable, enable
Disable
select
change
ESC
OK
Response to
CPU master stop
3
Substitute value, last value
Substitute value
change
ESC
OK
Station address
4
126
select
change
Adjustable
from ... to
OK
ESC
Station address
126
Baud rate
5
12,000 kBd
1... 126
select
execute
ESC
OK
Station address
ESC
OK
Substitute value
23
6
select
select
select
execute
ESC
OK
ESC
Station address
4
23
7
Parameters
disable CPU/Master
Off
select
change
select
change
ESC
OK
ESC
OK
OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting), then
the parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values stored in the GSD
file or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the parameter must be set
to "On".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-11
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
5. In order to permanently save the settings, proceed as follows:
Station address
4
23
select
change
ESC
OK
Fieldbus
10
select
select
ESC
OK
11
Saving
options
select
execute
OK
ESC
1
Function call
Save
settings
select
execute
OK
ESC
Save
settings
1
execute?
select
Yes
OK
ESC
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC
OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting) in the
menu "Field bus", the parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values
stored in the GSD data or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the
parameter must be set to "On".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-12
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.4.3
Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address via the Device Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft
Starter ES + SP1" Software
Carry out the following steps to activate the communication module:
1. Use an interface cable to connect the 3RW44 soft starter to a PC on which the
"Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter ES + Service Pack 1" software is
installed.
2. Start the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or "Soft Starter ES + Service Pack 1"
software.
3. Select "Switching device > Open online" in the menu.
4. In the "Open online" dialog box, select the "Local device interface" option and the
desired COM port under "Interface".
5. Click "OK".
6. Select "Device configuration" on the left-hand side of the window.
7. Activate the "Field bus interface" control box on the right-hand side of the
window.
8. Select "Device parameters > Field bus" on the left-hand side of the window.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-13
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
9. Select your station address from the dropdown list box on the right-hand side of
the window.
10.Select the "Load to Switching Device" icon in the tool bar.
11. Confirm the station address change with "OK".
12.Confirm the activation of the PROFIBUS DP communication module with "OK".
The PROFIBUS DP communication module has been activated.
13.When the "BUS" LED on the communication module blinks red and the
PROFIBUS icon
appears on the display, the communication module has
been activated successfully.
Notice
The soft starter only reads the station address automatically and permanently
saves it when the supply voltage of the soft starter is switched on (refer to
Chapter 8.6.5 "Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter" on Page
8-22) or following a "Restart" command.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-14
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.5
Soft Starter Configuration
8.5.1 Introduction
This section deals with the configuration and parameterization of soft starters.
• Configuring: Systematic arrangement of the individual soft starters (structure).
• Parameterization: Setting of the parameters using the configuration software.
Further information regarding parameters can be found in Chapter 8.10 "Data
Formats and Data Sets" on Page 8-35.
STEP 7
• The "Diagnose hardware" function is available with STEP 7 V5.1 from
correction version K5.1.2.0 onwards.
• Reloading of the configuration is not supported in STEP 7
(Target system → Load to PD).
• It is only possible to read the diagnosis via the CPU 315-2 DP
(using the "Diagnose hardware" function in STEP 7) up to
order number 6ES7315–2AF02.
8.5.2 Configuration with the GSD File
Definition of the GSD
The device master data (GSD) contain DP slave descriptions in a uniform
format. Use of the GSD simplifies the configuration of the DP master and the DP
slave.
Configuration with the GSD File
Soft starters are configured using the GSD file. The soft starter is embedded into
your system as a standard slave via the GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• from the Internet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/113630
The following GSD files are available:
• SIEM80DE.GSG (German)
• SIEM80DE.GSE (English)
• SIEM80DE.GSF (French)
• SIEM80DE.GSI (Italian)
• SIEM80DE.GSS (Spanish)
Notice
Your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.3, e.g. STEP 7
V5.1+Service Pack 2 and higher.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-15
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.5.3
Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software
Sirius 3RW44 soft starters can also be configured using the
Soft Starter ES Premium software.
There are two possibilities when using PROFIBUS DP:
• Stand-alone program on a PC/PD with PROFIBUS DP connection
• Integration with the object manager (OM) in STEP 7
Detailed information regarding Soft Starter ES can be found in the program's
online help.
8.5.4 Diagnostics Package
A free diagnostics package is available for 3RW44 soft starters. It contains HMI
diagnostic screens for touch panels. The diagnostics package is available in
German and English.
You can download the diagnostics package at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28557893
8.5.5 Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software
Soft Starter ES is the central software for commissioning, operating and
diagnosis of the SIRIUS 3RW44 High Feature soft starter series.
You can download the Soft Starter ES parameterizing software at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28323168. This is a free
14-day trial version.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-16
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.6
PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7
(Example)
8.6.1 Introduction
The following example shows you how to commission the PROFIBUS DP
communication module.
• Installation and activation of the PROFIBUS DP communication module (field
bus interface)
• Configuration with STEP 7 using the GSD file
• Integration into the user program
• Switching on
Necessary components
• 3RW44 soft starter
• 3RW49 00-0KC00 communication module
General prerequisites
• You have configured an infeed module with integrated S7 station
e.g. with CPU315-2 DP.
• You are proficient in STEP 7.
• The PD is connected to the DP master.
Software prerequisites
Configuration
software used
STEP 7
Configuration software
for the different DP
master used
Version
From
version
V5.1+SP2
onwards
Explanations
You have integrated the GSD file of the soft starter
into STEP 7.
You have integrated the GSD file of the soft starter
into the respective configuration tool.
Table 8-1: Software prerequisites for commissioning
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-17
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Prerequisites for commissioning
Required actions
For further information, refer to ...
1. The soft starter is installed
Chapter 3 "Installation, Connection
and Branch Layout" on Page 8-1
2. The PROFIBUS DP communication module is
installed
Chapter 8.3 "Installation of the
PROFIBUS DP Communication
Module" on Page 8-7.
3. The station address is set on the soft starter
Chapter 8.4.3 "Activating the
PROFIBUS DP Communication
Module (Field Bus Interface) and
Setting the Station Address via the
Device Interface using the "Soft
Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft
Starter ES + SP1" Software" on
Page 8-13.
4. The soft starter has been configured (configured Chapter 8.5 "Soft Starter
and parameterized)
Configuration" on Page 8-15
5. The supply voltage for the DP master is
switched on
DP master manual
6. The DP master is switched to the operating
state RUN
DP master manual
Table 8-2: Prerequisites for commissioning
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-18
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.6.2 Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7
Step
Description
1
Activate the PROFIBUS DP communication module as described in Chapter
8.4.
2
Set the desired station address as described in Chapter 8.4.
3
Switch on the supply voltage for the DP master CPU 315-2 DP at the infeed
module.
4
Observe the status LEDs of the DP master CPU 315-2 DP on the infeed
module:
5 V DC:
SF DP:
BUSF:
Lights up
Off
Blinking
5
Start the SIMATIC Manager and create a new project with a DP master
(e.g. CPU315-2 DP with DI 16 x24 V DC and DO 16 x24 V DC). Generate OB1
and OB82 for the project.
6
In HW config., call up the menu command Extras > Install new GSD file, and
integrate the GSD file of the soft starter into the configuration tool of the DP
master used. For the CPU315-2 used in the example, you can install
• the German GSD file SIEM80DE.GSG,
• the English GSD file SIEM80DE.GSE,
• the French GSD file SIEM80DE.GSF,
• the Spanish GSD file SIEM80DE.GSS,
• the Italian GSD file SIEM80DE.GSI
in the STEP 7 SIMATIC Manager.
7
Generate the PROFIBUS DP subnet.
8
Add the soft starter from the hardware catalog to the PROFIBUS under
PROFIBUS DP > Additional field devices > Switching devices > Motor starters
> Direct on line soft starters > Sirius 3RW44.
9
Set the station address for the soft starter to 3 (or higher).
Drag the module from the selection list of the dropdown menu to slot 1 of the
Sirius 3RW44:
Module/
DP ID
Slot
10
1
192
Order number
O
addr.
I addr.
3RW4422-*BC** 2...3*)
Comment
2...3*)
*) Depending on the structure
Open the "DP slave characteristics" dialog with a double click.
..
Rated operating current
..
Click on "Parameterization". Set the parameters **), e.g.
11
Click "OK". The configuration is completed.
12
Save the configuration.
Table 8-3: Commissioning
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-19
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
**) Notice
During parameterization with the GSD file, it is possible to select values that are
dependent on each other, but which are not permissible in combination. The
respective parameter is reported as an "Incorrect parameter value" in data set
92.
The following table shows which parameters are dependent on each other and
how these must be set:
Parameter
Settings
Rated operating current Ie
Depends on
Tripping class CLASS (refer to
Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data
Power Unit" on Page 10-12).
Maximum current limit value
Greater than
Minimum current limit value Chapter
5.4.6 "Specifying Current Limit
Values" on Page 5-27.
Maximum starting time
Greater than
Starting time Chapter 5.4.3
"Specifying the Starting Mode" on
Page 5-13.
Limiting torque
Greater than
Start torque Chapter 5.4.3
"Specifying the Starting Mode" on
Page 5-13, torque control and torque
control with current limiting.
Table 8-4: Interdependent parameter settings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-20
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.6.3
Integration into the User Program
Step
1
Description
Create the user program in the LAD/STL/CSF editor in OB1.
Example: Reading an input and controlling an output:
Cyclically copy the central DIs (switches) to the decentralized motor starter (=PAA).
Cyclically output the PAE of the motor starter to the central DOs (LED).
// PAA: read in switches 0-7 (DI 16 x 24 V DC)
// y emitir al arrancador de motor
// EB0.0
// EB0.1
// EB0.2
Motor - RIGHT
Motor - LEFT
0
// Read in the motor starter PAE
// and output to D016xDC24V
2
Save the project in the SIMATIC manager.
3
Load the configuration into the DP master.
Table 8-5: Integration into the User Program
8.6.4 Switching On
Step
1
Description
Switch on the voltage supply for the soft starter.
Observe the status LEDs on the DP master CPU315-2 DP:
2
3
5 V DC:
Lights up
SF DP:
Off
BUSF:
Off
Observe the status LEDs on the PROFIBUS module:
LED BUS: Lights up green
Table 8-6: Switching on
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-21
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.6.5 Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter
Switch on the supply voltage
for the soft starter
The soft starter sets the outputs to "0"
and accepts the set station
address
The "BUS" LED is red
The soft starter receives
the configuration data from the DP
master
Do the configuration
data match the actual structure?
No
Yes
The "BUS" LED lights up green;
Inputs and outputs are enabled; data
exchange is possible
Remedy: Match the configuration
data to the
structure or vice versa
Ready for operation
Figure 8-14:PROFIBUS DP - starting the soft starter
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-22
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.7
Process Data and Process Images
Definition of the process image
The process image is part of the system memory of the DP master. At the
beginning of the cyclical program, the signal statuses of the inputs are
transmitted to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclical
program, the process image of the outputs is transmitted to the DP slave as a
signal status.
Soft starters with PROFIBUS DP have the following process image:
• Process image with 2 byte outputs / 2 byte inputs (16 O / 16 I)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-23
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Table
The following table contains process data and process images:
Process image:
(16 O, DO 0.0 to DO 1.7)
(16 I, DI 0.0 to DI 1.7)
Process data
Outputs
DO- 0.
2
Available
3
Trip reset
4
Emergency start
5
Available
6
Slow speed
7
Available
0
Output 1
1
Output 2
PS1
PS2
PS3
Process image error
Motor LEFT
Parameter set 3
1
Parameter set 2
Motor RIGHT
Parameter set 1
0
0
1
0
1
2
Parameter set Bit 0
0
0
1
1
3
Parameter set Bit 1
4
Available
5
Available
6
Available
7
Disable quick stop
0
Ready (automatic)
1
Motor on
2
Group error
3
Group warning
4
Input 1
5
Input 2
6
Input 3
7
Input 4
0
Motor current Iact-bit0
1
Motor current Iact-bit1
2
Motor current Iact-bit2
3
Motor current Iact-bit3
4
Motor current Iact-bit4
5
Motor current Iact-bit5
6
Manual operation local operating mode
7
Ramp operation
DO- 1.
Inputs
DI- 0.
DI- 1.
Table 8-7: Process data and process images
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-24
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.8
Diagnosis via LED Display
LED
BUS
Description
Red
Bus error
Red blinking
Parameter error
Red flickering
Basic factory settings restored (red flickering
for 5 sec)
Red-green
toggling*)
Parameter error while starting S7
Green
Device exchanging data!
Yellow
Device not initialized and bus error!
(Send in device!)
Yellow-green
blinking
Device not initialized and parameter error!
(Send in device!)
Off
Device not exchanging data!
Specifications
Error:
Frequency
specifications:
BE = Bus error
Blinking: 0.5 Hz
Flickering: 8 to 10 Hz
*) Toggling: 2 to 10 Hz
Table 8-8: Diagnosis via LED display
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-25
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9
Diagnosis with STEP 7
8.9.1 Reading the Diagnosis
Length of the diagnosis telegram
The maximum length of the telegram is 32 byte.
8.9.2 Options for Reading the Diagnosis
Automation system with
DP master
SIMATIC S7/M7
Module or register in
STEP 7
Application
Refer to ...
SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" Reading the slave diagnosis
Chapter 8.9.3 "Structure of the
(store in data area of the user Slave Diagnosis" on Page 8-27,
program)
For SFC, refer to the online help
in STEP 7
Table 8-9: Reading the diagnosis with STEP 7
Reading the S7 diagnosis with SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" (example)
This is an example of how to read the slave diagnosis for a DP slave in the
STEP 7 user program using SFC 13.
Assumptions
The following assumptions are true for this STEP 7 user program:
• The diagnostic address is 1022 (3FE H).
• The slave diagnosis should be stored in DB82: from address 0.0,
length 32 bytes.
• The slave diagnosis consists of 32 bytes.
STEP 7 user program
STL
CALL
Explanation
SFC 13
REQ
:=TRUE
Read request
LADDR
:=W#16#3FE
Diagnostic address
RET_VAL :=MW0
RET_VAL of SFC 13
RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 32
Data compartment for diagnosis in DB82
BUSY
Read
:=M2.0
operation
runs
over
several
OB1
cycles
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-26
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Structure of the Slave Diagnosis
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Station status 1 to 3
Byte 3
Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4
Byte 5
High byte
Low byte
Byte 6
Byte 7
Code-based diagnosis
..
.
Byte 12
Byte 8
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
..
.
up to max.
Byte 31
..
.
..
.
Manufacturer code
Module status
(here: soft starter)
Details
8.9.3
Channel-based diagnosis
(3 bytes per channel)
Figure 8-15:Structure of the slave diagnosis
Notice
The length of the diagnosis telegram varies between 13 and 32 bytes. The
length of the diagnosis telegram last received can be seen in
STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of SFC 13.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-27
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9.4
Station Status 1 to 3
Definition
Station status 1 to 3 gives an overview of the status of a
DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit
Meaning
Cause/Remedy
0
1:
The DP slave cannot be addressed by the • Has the station address been set correctly at the DP slave?
DP master.
• Is the bus connector connected?
• Is voltage applied at the DP slave?
• Is the RS 485 repeater set correctly?
• Has a reset been carried out on the DP slave?
1
1:
The DP slave is not yet ready for data
exchange.
• Wait, since the DP slave is just starting up.
2
1:
The configuration data sent to the DP
slave by the DP master do not match the
structure of the DP slave.
• Has the correct station type or the correct structure for the
DP slave been entered into the configuration software?
3
1:
There is an external diagnosis. (Group
diagnosis display)
4
1:
The requested function is not supported
by the DP slave (e.g. changing of the
station address via software).
• Check the configuration.
• Analyze the code-based diagnosis, the module status and /
or the channel-related diagnosis. As soon as all errors have
been remedied, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set again when a
new diagnosis message is available in the bytes of the
above mentioned diagnoses.
5
1:
The DP master cannot interpret the reply
from the DP slave.
• Check the bus design.
6
1:
The DP slave type does not match the
software configuration.
• Has the correct station type been entered into the
configuration software?
7
1:
The DP slave was parameterized by a
• Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the DP slave with
different DP master (not by the DP master
the PD or another DP master, for example.
accessing the DP slave at the moment).
The station address of the DP master which carried out the
parameterization of the DP slave can be found in the
"Master PROFIBUS Address" diagnostic byte.
Table 8-10: Station status 1 structure (byte 0)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-28
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Station status 2
Bit
Meaning
0
1:
The DP slave must be newly parameterized.
1
1:
There is a diagnosis message. The DP slave does not function until the error
has been remedied (static diagnosis message).
2
1:
The bit is always set to "1" when a DP slave with this station address exists.
3
1:
The watchdog function is activated for this DP slave.
4
1:
The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" command1).
5
1:
The DP slave has received the "SYNC" command1).
6
0:
Bit is always "0".
7
1:
The DP slave has been deactivated, i.e. it is not part of the current
processing.
1) The bit is only updated if another diagnosis message changes.
Table 8-11: Station status 2 structure (byte 1)
Station status 3
Bit
Meaning
0 to 6
0:
Bits are always "0".
7
1:
• There are more diagnosis messages than the DP slave can store.
• The DP master cannot write all diagnosis messages sent by the DP
slave in its diagnosis buffer (channel-based diagnosis).
Table 8-12: Station status 3 structure (byte 2)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-29
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9.5
Master PROFIBUS Address
Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte stores the station address of the
DP master:
• which has carried out the parameterization of the DP slave and
• has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnosis.
8.9.6 Manufacturer Code
Definition
The manufacturer code contains a code describing the type of DP slave.
Manufacturer code
Byte 4
80H
Byte 5
DEH
Manufacturer code for
Soft starters
Table 8-13: Structure of the manufacturer code
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-30
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9.7
Code-Based Diagnosis
Definition
Code-based diagnosis indicates whether or not there are any faulty soft starters.
The code-based diagnosis begins with byte 6 and comprises 2 bytes.
Code-based diagnosis
The structure of the code-based diagnosis for soft starters is as follows:
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
= 0x42
Length of the code-based diagnosis
including byte 6 (=2 bytes)
Code for code-based diagnosis
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
0: Channel-based diagnosis not available
1: Channel-based diagnosis available
Figure 8-16:Structure of the code-based diagnosis
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-31
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9.8
Module Status
Definition
The module status reflects the status of the configured module (here: soft
starter) and represents a specification of the code-based diagnosis. The module
status starts after the code-based diagnosis and comprises 5 bytes.
Module status structure
The structure of the module status is as follows:
Byte 8
7 6 5
0 Bit number
= 0x05
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Length of the module status
including byte 8 (=5 bytes)
Code for module status
7
Byte 9
0
82H
7
0
Byte 10
0H
Not relevant
Byte 11
0H
Not relevant
7
Byte 12
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
0
0
0
x
00B: Soft starter OK; valid user data
01B: Soft starter error; invalid user data
Figure 8-17:Structure of the module status
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-32
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.9.9
Channel-Based Diagnosis
Definition
The channel-based diagnosis provides information about channel errors of the
modules (here: soft starter) and represents a specification of the code-based
diagnosis. The channel-based diagnosis starts after the module status. The
maximum length is restricted to the maximum overall length of the slave
diagnosis, i.e. 31 bytes. The channel-based diagnosis does not affect the
module status.
The number of channel-based diagnosis messages is restricted to 9 (also refer
to station status 3, bit 7).
Channel-based diagnosis
The structure of the channel-based diagnosis is as follows:
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 13 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Code for channel-based diagnosis
7 6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 14 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
7
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 15 0 0 0
Error type (table on the next page)
Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 16 to
Byte 18
to
max. byte 31
Next channel-based diagnosis message
(same assignment as byte 13 to 15)
Figure 8-18:Structure of the channel-based diagnosis
Notice
The channel-based diagnosis is always updated up to the current diagnosis
message in the diagnosis telegram. Subsequent older diagnosis messages are
not deleted. Remedy: Analyze the valid current length of the diagnosis telegram:
• STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of SFC 13.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-33
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Error types
The diagnosis message is reported on channel 0.
E
No.
Error type
Meaning/Cause
Delete signal bit / Acknowledgement
E1
00001:
Short-circuit
• Short-circuit in the temperature sensor
The signal bit is deleted automatically when
the cause for the switch-off has been
remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
E4
00100:
Overload
• Overload of the temperature sensor
• Overload of the thermal motor model
The signal bit is updated continuously.
E5
00101:
Overtemperature
• Overload of the contact block
The signal bit is deleted automatically when
the cause for the switch-off has been
remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
E6
00110:
Line breakage
• Wire break in the temperature sensor
E7
00111:
Maximum limit
value exceeded
• Ie limit value exceeded
E8
01000:
Minimum limit
value undershot
• Ie limit value undershot
E9
01001:
Error
• Internal error/device error
• Contact block defective
The signal bit can be deleted when the cause
of the error has been remedied by
• Switching the supply voltage off/on
• Issuing the "Restart" command if possible
E16
10000:
Parameter error
• Incorrect parameter value
The signal bit is always deleted after
acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
10001:
E17 No supply or load
voltage
• Electronics supply voltage too low
• No supply voltage at the contact block
• No line voltage
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for
the switch-off has been remedied or
acknowledged automatically.
11000:
E24 Actuator switchoff
•
•
•
•
The signal bit is always deleted after
acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
Additional acknowledgement in combination
with other errors.
E26
11010:
External error
Switch-off
Switch-off
Switch-off
Switch-off
due
due
due
due
to
to
to
to
overload
residual current
asymmetry
ground fault
• Overload of the sensor supply
• Process image error
The signal bit is updated continuously
The signal bit is always deleted after
acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
Table 8-14: Error types
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-34
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.10
Data Formats and Data Sets
8.10.1 Characteristics
The soft starter acquires a multitude of operating, diagnostics and statistics data.
Control data
Data transmitted to the soft starter, e.g. Motor LEFT switching command, Trip
reset, etc.
Data format: Bit
Messages
Data transmitted by the soft starter indicating the current operating status, e.g.
Motor left, etc.
Data format: Bit
Diagnosis
Data transmitted by the soft starter indicating the current operating status, e.g.
Overload fault mode, etc.
Data format: Bit
Current values
Current values are coded in different current formats, in
• 6-bit current format,
• 8-bit current format and
• 9-bit current format:
9-bit current format
8-bit current format
6-bit current format
Bit 8
7
6
23 22 21
5
4
3
2
1
0
20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 1.96875 (q 0 to 197 %)
4+2
8+4+2
1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 7.97 (q 0 to 797 %)
1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 15.97 (q 0 to 1597 %)
Figure 8-19:Current formats
Current values are
• Motor current Imax (6-bit current format)
• Phase currents IL1max, IL2max, IL3max (8-bit current format)
• Last trigger current (9-bit current format)
• Maximum tripping current (9-bit current format)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-35
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Statistics data for device service life
• Operating hours
The soft starter records 2 operating hour values:
– The motor operating hours.
These indicate how long the motor has been switched on.
– The device operating hours (soft starter).
These indicate how long the 115 V AC or 230 V AC supply voltage of the soft
starter has been switched on.
Both operating hour values are recorded in data set 95 - "Read statistics".
They are recorded in the "Operating hours" data field once every second.
The operating hours are recorded in the range of 0 to 232 seconds in
1-second increments.
• Number of overload trips
The soft starter counts the number of overload trips in the range of 0 to 65 535.
• Number of starts motor right / left
The soft starter counts the number of starts in the range of 0 to 232.
Example: The value is increased by 1 when current is flowing in the main
circuit following a "Motor ON" command.
• Number of starts, outputs 1 to 4
• Motor current Imax.
The soft starter measures the current in all 3 phases and indicates the current
of the phase with the highest load as a percentage [%] of the set current Ie.
Data format: 1 byte, 8-bit current format
Example: Set current I e = 60 A
Indicated motor current 110 %
corresponds to 60 A x 1.1 = 66 A
All 3 phase currents are available in data set 94
• Last trigger current
The soft starter measures the current in all 3 phases and indicates the current
flowing through the phase with the highest load at the time of the tripping as a
percentage [%] of the set current Ie and in amperes [A]
Data format: 2 byte, 9-bit current format
Example: Set current I e = 60 A
indicated motor current 455 % corresponds to 60 A x 4.55 = 273 A
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-36
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Statistics data of the maximum pointer
Maximum pointers are used for preventive diagnosis:
– The maximum measured value is stored in the device.
– The higher-level PLC can collect the measured value at any time.
– The higher-level PLC can delete the measured value at any time.
The following data are available as maximum pointers:
• Number of overload trips.
• Phase current IL1max to IL3max and IL1min to IL3min. The maximum and
minimum phase current are indicated as a percentage [%] of the set current Ie
and in amperes [A].
Data format: Each 1 byte, 8-bit current format.
The measured maximum and minimum phase current in bridging mode is
stored for each phase.
• Minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltages U Lx - ULy as r.m.s values in
0.1 V. Minimum and maximum line frequency in 0.5 Hz resolution.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-37
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.11
Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes
8.11.1 Identification Number (ID No.)
The identification number (ID No.) is used for the unique identification of all
information available in the soft starter (parameters, control commands,
diagnosis, commands, etc.). It can be found in the left column of the data set
table.
8.11.2 Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement
Description
When a data set is declined, an error code is sent together with the negative
acknowledgement via the device interface as well as via the bus interface. The
error code provides information on the reason for the negative
acknowledgement.
The error codes comply with the PROFIBUS DPV1 standard in so far as they
apply to soft starters.
Analysis via the local device interface using Soft starter ES
The error codes are analyzed by the "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and
diagnostics software and output as plain text. For further information on this
topic, please refer to the "Soft Starter ES" online help.
Analysis via PROFIBUS DP
The error codes are output via PROFIBUS DP layer 2. For further information on
this topic, please refer to the section describing the PROFIBUS DP protocol in
the respective manuals.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-38
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Error codes
The following error codes are generated by the soft starter:
Error codes
byte
High
00 H
Error message
Cause
Low
00 H
No error
Communication interface
80 H
A0 H
Negative acknowledgement
"Read data set"
• Data set can only be written
80 H
A1 H
Negative acknowledgement
"Write data set"
• Data set can only be read
80 H
A2 H
Protocol error
• Layer 2 (field bus)
• Device interface
• Incorrect coordination
80 H
A9 H
This function is not supported!
• DPV1 service does not
support reading/writing of the
data set
Technology access
80 H
B0 H
Unknown data set number
• Data set number not known in
the soft starter
80 H
B1 H
Incorrect data set length when writing
• Data set length differs from
data set length specified
80 H
80 H
B2 H
B6 H
Incorrect slot number
• Slot number not 1 or 4
Communication partner declined data
acceptance!
• Incorrect operating mode
(automatic, manual bus,
manual operation local)
• Data set can only be read
• Parameter changes not
permissible when ON
80 H
B8 H
Invalid parameter
• Incorrect parameter value
Device resources
80 H
C2 H Temporary lack of resources in the
device!
• No available receive buffer
• The data set is currently being
updated
• The data set order is currently
active at another interface
Table 8-15: Error codes
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-39
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12
Data Sets
Writing/reading data sets with STEP 7
You can access the soft starter data sets via the user program.
• Writing data sets:
S7-DPV1 master: By calling up SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master: By calling up SFC 58
• Reading data sets:
S7-DPV1 master: By calling up SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master: By calling up SFC 59
Further information
For further information regarding SFBs, please refer to
• the reference manual
"System software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
• in the STEP 7 online help
Byte arrangements
When data are stored which are longer than one byte, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian")
Byte arrangement
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 2
High byte
Byte 3
Low byte
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 0
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 1
Data type
High word
Double word
Low word
Word
Byte
Table 8-16: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-40
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.1 Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs
Note
Please keep in mind that data set 68 is overwritten by the cyclical process image
in automatic operating mode!
Byte
Meaning
Preamble
0
Writing coordination 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
1-3
Reserved = 0
Process image of the outputs
4
Process data DO-0.0 to DO-0.7, table below
5
Process data DO-1.0 to DO-1.7, table below
6
Reserved = 0
7
Reserved = 0
ID No.
1001
Process data
DO- 0.
Process image:
(16 A (outputs), DO 0.0 to DO 1.7)
0 Motor RIGHT
1002
1 Motor LEFT
1003
2 Available
1004
3 Trip reset
1005
4 Emergency start
1006
5 Available
1007
6 Slow speed
1008
7 Available
1009
DO- 1.
0 Output 1
1010
1 Output 2
1011
2 Parameter set Bit 0
1012
3 Parameter set Bit 1
1013
4 Available
1014
5 Available
1015
6 Available
1016
7 Disable quick stop
Table 8-17: Data set 68 - reading/writing the process image of the outputs
In the "Automatic operating mode", the PLC specifies the process image of the
outputs. In this case, reading of data set 68 at the local device interface supplies
the process image of the outputs as transmitted by the PLC.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-41
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.2 Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs
Byte
Meaning
Process image of the inputs
0
Process data DI-0.0 to DI-0.7, table below
1
Process data DI-1.0 to DI-1.7, table below
2
Reserved = 0
3
Reserved = 0
ID
No.
1101
Process data
DI- 0.
Process image:
(16 I (inputs), DI 0.0 to DI 1.7)
0 Ready (automatic)
1102
1 Motor on
1103
2 Group error
1104
3 Group warning
1105
4 Input 1
1106
5 Input 2
1107
6 Input 3
1108
7 Input 4
1109
DI- 1.
0 Motor current Iact-bit0
1110
1 Motor current Iact-bit1
1111
2 Motor current Iact-bit2
1112
3 Motor current Iact-bit3
1113
4 Motor current Iact-bit4
1114
5 Motor current Iact-bit5
1115
6 Manual operation local operating mode
1116
7 Ramp operation
Table 8-18: Data set 69 - reading the process image of the inputs
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-42
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.3 Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors
Byte
Meaning
Value range
32
s
Increment
0-3
Operating hours - device
1 ... 2
1 second
4-5
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32,767
1
6-9
Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
10 - 11
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32,767
1
120 - 123 Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
124 - 125 ID number of the tripping
0 ... ± 32,767
1
Comment
Oldest
entry
Second oldest
entry
etc.
Last,
newest entry
Table 8-19: Data set 72 - log list - reading device errors
This data set can record 21 entries. When all spaces are filled, the first entry is
overwritten.
Note
The latest entry is entered at the end of the data set. The remaining entries are
moved up by one entry.
The following messages can be entered:
ID No.
Device error - Messages
452
Heatsink - thermistor defective
1466
Switching element 1 failed
1467
Switching element 2 failed
1468
Switching element 3 failed
1417
Bypass element fault
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-43
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.4 Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings
Byte
Meaning
Value range
32
s
Increment
Comment
0-3
Operating hours - device
1 ... 2
1 second
4-5
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32,767
1
Oldest entry
6-9
Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
10 - 11
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32, 767
1
Second oldest
entry
120 - 123
Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
124 - 125
ID number of the tripping
0 ... ± 32, 767
1
etc.
Last,
newest entry
Table 8-20: Data set 73 - log list - reading the trippings
This data set can record 21 entries. When all spaces are filled, the first entry is
overwritten.
Note
The latest entry is entered at the end of the data set. The remaining entries are
moved up by one entry.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-44
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
The following messages can be entered:
ID No.
Trippings - Messages
309
Contact block overload
317
Electronics supply voltage too low
319
No line voltage
324
Temperature sensor overload
325
Temperature sensor open
326
Temperature sensor short-circuit
327
Thermal motor model overload
334
Ie limit value exceeded
335
Ie limit value undershot
339
Motor stalled - switched off
341
Asymmetry switch-off
343
Ground fault switch-off
355
Process image error
365
Incorrect parameter value
ID number of the faulty parameter
1407
Electronics supply voltage too high
1408
No load
1409
Loss of phase L1
1410
Loss of phase L2
1411
Loss of phase L3
1421
Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings
1479
Phase angle control failure
1481
Line voltage too high
1482
Current range exceeded
Table 8-21: Log list messages - reading the trippings
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-45
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.5 Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events
Byte
Meaning
Value range
32
s
Increment
0-3
Operating hours - device
1 ... 2
1 second
4-5
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32 ,767 *)
1
6-9
Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
10 - 11
ID number of the device
error
0 ... ± 32 ,767 *)
1
120 - 123
Operating hours - device
1 ... 232 s
1 second
124 - 125
ID number of the tripping
0 ... ± 32 ,767 *)
1
Comment
Oldest
entry
Second oldest
entry
etc.
Last,
newest
entry
*) + coming event
– going event
Table 8-22: Data set 75 log list - reading events
This data set can record 21 entries. When all spaces are filled, the first entry is
overwritten.
Note
The latest entry is entered at the end of the data set. The remaining entries are
moved up by one entry.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-46
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
The following messages can be entered:
ID
No.
Events - Messages
Comment
Warnings
324
Temperature sensor overload
± (coming/going event)
325
Temperature sensor open
± (coming/going event)
326
Temperature sensor short-circuit
± (coming/going event)
327
Thermal motor model overload
± (coming/going event)
334
Ie limit value exceeded
± (coming/going event)
335
Ie limit value undershot
± (coming/going event)
340
Asymmetry recognized
± (coming/going event)
342
Ground fault
± (coming/going event)
Actions
310
Emergency start is active
± (coming/going event)
357
Automatic operating mode
+ (coming event only)
358
Manual bus operating mode
+ (coming event only)
359
Manual operation local operating mode
+ (coming event only)
360
Connection break in manual operating
mode
± (coming/going event)
363
Maximum pointer deleted
+ (coming event only)
365
Incorrect parameter value
+ (coming event only)
ID number of the faulty parameter
+ (coming event only)
366
+ (coming event only)
Parameter changes not permissible
when ON
ID number of the faulty parameter
+ (coming event only)
368
Parameterization disable CPU/master
active
± (coming/going event)
369
Basic factory settings restored
+ (coming event only)
1302
Log list - trippings deleted
+ (coming event only)
1303
Log list - events deleted
+ (coming event only)
Table 8-23: Log list messages - reading events
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-47
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.6 Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131
Data set 81 matches data set 131 in structure and content. Data set 81 supplies
the default values for all parameters of data set 131.
8.12.7 Data Set 82 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 132
Data set 82 matches data set 132 in structure and content. Data set 82 supplies
the default values for all parameters of data set 132.
8.12.8 Data Set 83 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 133
Data set 83 matches data set 133 in structure and content. Data set 83 supplies
the default values for all parameters of data set 133.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-48
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.9 Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis
ID
No.
ByteBit
Signal bit
E
No.*)
Meaning/Acknowledgment
Switching/controlling:
301
0
306
0
Ready (automatic)
—
Device ready for operation via host (e.g. PLC).
The signal bit is updated continuously.
01
Motor right
—
Contact block 1 switched on.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
307
02
Motor left
—
Contact block 2 switched on.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
309
03
Contact block overload
E5,
E24
For example, power semiconductor too hot, causing the
motor to switch off.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-off
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
308
04
Contact block defective
E9
For example, contactor welded/blocked or power
semiconductor short-circuited.
The signal bit can only be deleted by switching the supply
voltage off / on when the cause of error is remedied.
310
05
Emergency start is active
—
The signal bit is deleted when the emergency start is
deactivated.
302
06
Group error
—
At least one error is set which generates an error
number.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-off
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset",
autoreset or OFF command.
304
07
Group warning
—
At least one warning is pending.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
10
Reserved = 0
—
No line voltage
E17,
E24
Reserved = 0
—
319
1
1
12
3
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switchoff has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
312
1
Start mode active
—
313
14
Stopping mode active
—
15
Reserved = 0
—
316
16
Electrical braking procedure is
active
—
The braking output is switched on by the soft starter.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
314
17
Slow speed active
—
The signal bit is updated continuously.
324
20
Temperature sensor overload
E4
Overload recognized, the signal bit is updated
continuously.
325
21
Temperature sensor open
E6
The thermistor circuit has been interrupted.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
326
22
Temperature sensor short-circuit
E1
Short-circuit in the thermistor circuit.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
Protective function: Motor/line/short-circuit
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-49
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Signal bit
E
No.*)
Meaning/Acknowledgment
327
23
Thermal motor model overload
E4
Overload recognized, the signal bit is updated
continuously.
328
24
Overload switch-off
E24
The motor is switched off due to a recognized overload.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-off
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset" /
"Autoreset".
329
25
Idle time active
—
The signal bit is updated continuously.
330
26
Cool-down time active
—
The signal bit is updated continuously.
27
Reserved = 0
—
30-6
Reserved = 0
—
352
37
Control input
—
The device receives control commands via the inputs.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
340
40
Asymmetry recognized
—
There is asymmetry. The signal bit is updated
continuously.
341
41
Asymmetry switch-off
E24
The motor is switched off due to asymmetry.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switchoff has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
334
42
Ie limit value exceeded
E7
Limit value exceeded.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
335
43
Ie limit value undershot
E8
Limit value undershot.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
336
44
Ie limit switch-off
E24
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switchoff has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
45
Reserved = 0
—
6
Reserved = 0
—
339
47
Motor stalled - switched off
E24
344
50
Input 1
—
345
51
Input 2
—
346
52
Input 3
—
347
53
Input 4
—
54-7
Reserved = 0
—
342
60
Ground fault
—
There is a ground fault.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
343
61
Ground fault switch-off
E24
The motor is switched off due to a ground fault.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switchoff has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
4
Switch-off, blocking current detected longer than
permissible blocking time. The signal bit is deleted when
the cause for the switch-off has been remedied and
acknowledged via "Trip reset".
Input statuses:
"1" = active, HIGH level applied
"0" = inactive, LOW level applied
The signal bit is updated continuously.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-50
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Signal bit
62
Quick stop active
63
Reserved = 0
361
64
362
353
E
No.*)
Meaning/Acknowledgment
E26,
E24
The motor is switched off due to a quick stop.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switchoff has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
Trip reset carried out
—
The signal bit is deleted by update or "Trip reset" in
ready state.
65
Trip reset not possible
—
Cause for the switch-off is still present.
The signal bit is deleted by update (new "Trip reset") or by
"Trip reset" in ready state.
363
66
Maximum pointer deleted
—
The signal bit is always deleted after acknowledgement
with "Trip reset".
317
67
Electronics supply
voltage too low
—
The signal bit is deleted automatically when the cause
for the switch-off is remedied.
Communication
303
70
Bus error
—
Watchdog function of the DP interface has elapsed.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
356
71
CPU/master STOP
—
PLC program no longer processed.
The signal bit is updated continuously.
357
72
Automatic operating mode
—
Automatic (PLC-controlled).
The signal bit is updated continuously.
358
73
Manual bus operating mode
—
Manual operation via field bus (O&M controlled).
The signal bit is updated continuously.
359
74
Manual operation local operating
mode
—
Manual operation via local device interface
(O&M controlled). The signal bit is updated continuously.
75
Reserved = 0
—
Connection break
in manual operation local operating
mode
—
The associated communication connection was
interrupted during manual operation. The signal bit is
updated continuously.
Process image error
E26
E24
Process image of the outputs contains impermissible bit
combinations. The signal bit is automatically deleted when
the cause for the switch-off is remedied.
6
360
7
355
77
364
80
Parameterization active
—
The signal bit is updated continuously.
365
81
Incorrect parameter value
E16
The signal bit is always deleted following an
acknowledgement with "Trip reset" or after valid
parameters have been received.
E24
Causes a switch-off during starting.
366
8
2
368
Parameter
Parameter changes not permissible —
when ON
Parameter change attempted while motor running or
during the affected device function, causing a switch-off.
The signal bit is always deleted following an
acknowledgement with "Trip reset" or after valid
parameters have been received.
83
Parameterization disable CPU/
master active
—
The signal bit is updated continuously.
The soft starter ignores the parameters from the PLC.
84-7
Reserved = 0
—
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-51
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Signal bit
E
No.*)
Meaning/Acknowledgment
Device function
90-2
Reserved = 0
—
93
Basic factory settings restored
—
94-7
Reserved = 0
—
10
Faulty parameter number (low byte) —
11
Faulty parameter number (high
byte)
—
120-1
Reserved = 0
—
Impermissible Ie/CLASS settings
—
Reserved = 0
—
1449 130
Parameter set 1 active
—
1450 131
Parameter set 2 active
—
1451 132
Parameter set 3 active
—
Reserved = 0
—
Impermissible change of the
parameter set
—
135-7
Reserved = 0
—
0-1
369
367
1421 122
123-7
133
1453 134
Reserved = 0
—
1404
142
Motor heating active
—
1402
143
DC braking active
—
Dynamic DC braking active
—
14
1403 14
4
1471
145
Motor connection method star/delta —
1472
146
Motor connection method inside
delta
—
Motor connection method unknown
—
1473 147
0
No load
—
151
Reserved = 0
—
1409
152
Loss of phase L1
—
1410
153
Loss of phase L2
—
1411
15
4
Loss of phase L3
—
1412
155
Line phase direction right
—
1413
156
Line phase direction left
—
Reserved = 0
—
1408 15
15
7
16
Reserved = 0
—
170
Output 1 active
—
1
Output 2 active
—
1437
172
Output 3 active
—
1438
173
Output 4 active
—
1435
1436 17
The signal bit is always deleted after acknowledgement
with "Trip reset".
In connection with byte 8 1 and 82, states the ID number
of the first parameter not accepted.
The signal byte is always deleted after
acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-52
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Signal bit
E
No.*)
174-7
Reserved = 0
—
18
Reserved = 0
—
Meaning/Acknowledgment
Switching/controlling
1407 190
Electronics supply voltage too high
—
1470 191
Ready for motor on
—
1414 192
Contact block short-circuited
—
1417 193
Bypass element fault
—
1418 194
Reserved = 0
—
1466 195
Switching element 1 failed
—
1467 196
Switching element 2 failed
—
1468 197
Switching element 3 failed
—
Protective function
1422 200
201-2
1479 203
204-7
Thermal motor model deactivated
—
Reserved = 0
—
Phase angle control failure
—
Reserved = 0
—
1415 210
Cool-down time contact block active —
1416 211
Contact element too hot for starting —
1482 212
Current range exceeded
—
Reserved = 0
—
213-7
Communication
357
220
Automatic operating mode
(redundant to bit 7.2)
—
358
221
Manual bus operating mode
(redundant to bit 7.3)
—
1443 222
Manual bus - PC-controlled
—
Manual operation local operating
mode (redundant to bit 7.4)
—
1444 224
Manual operation local - inputcontrolled
—
1445 225
Manual operation local - O&Mcontrolled
—
1446 226
Manual operation local - PCcontrolled
—
227
Reserved = 0
—
23
Reserved = 0
—
359
223
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-53
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
E
No.*)
Signal bit
Meaning/Acknowledgment
Prewarnings
240-1
Reserved = 0
—
1419 242
Prewarning limit - remaining time
for tripping undershot
—
1420 243
Prewarning limit - motor heat buildup exceeded
—
244-7
Reserved = 0
—
25
Reserved = 0
—
26
Reserved = 0
—
27
Reserved = 0
—
28
Reserved = 0
—
29
Reserved = 0
—
Table 8-24: Data set 92 - reading the device diagnosis
*) Error numbers, PROFIBUS DP
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-54
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.10 Data Set 93 - Writing a Command
Structure of the command data set
Byte
Meaning
Comment
Preamble
0
Coordination
1-3
Reserved
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Command
4
Number of commands
Value range 1 ... 5
Number of subsequent valid commands
5
Command 1
For the consecutive number, refer to the table below
6
Command 2
Optional (for coding, refer to the table below)
7
Command 3
Optional (for coding, refer to the table below)
8
Command 4
Optional (for coding, refer to the table below)
9
Command 5
Optional (for coding, refer to the table below)
Table 8-25: Structure of the command data set
ID No.
Coding
Command
Meaning
1-byte commands
0
0
Reserved
No function
703
1
Trip reset
Reset and acknowledgement of error messages
713
2
Emergency start ON
Switch on emergency start
714
3
Emergency start OFF
Switch off emergency start
709
4
Automatic operating mode Transition to automatic operating mode (DP master-controlled)
710
711
712
5
Operating mode manual
- bus
- operation local
Transition to manual operating mode. The soft starter switches to
manual bus or manual operation local operating mode, depending on
the interface via which the command is received.
701
6
Restore basic factory
settings
Restore basic factory settings of the parameters.
704
7
Delete maximum pointer
The measured values for the preventive diagnosis are deleted (=0).
705
13
Log list delete trippings
Delete log list with recorded causes of errors.
706
14
Log list delete events
Delete log list with recorded warning messages and certain actions.
702
9
Restart
Trigger restarting (same as after line ON), e.g. after reassigning the
station address.
707
10
Parameterization disable
CPU/master ON
No parameterization possible via the parameterizing master, or this
master's parameters are ignored.
708
11
Parameterization disable
CPU/master OFF
Parameterization possible via the parameterizing master.
Table 8-26: Data set 93 - writing a command
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-55
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.11 Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Value range / [coding]
Increment
Comment
Measured values
504 0
Phase current IL1 (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
8-bit current
format
505 1
Phase current IL2 (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
8-bit current
format
506 2
Phase current IL3 (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
8-bit current
format
507 3
Reserved = 0
501 4 - 5
502
Remaining cool-down time of the motor 0 ... 1, 800 s / [0 ... 18 ,000]
0.1 s
60-6
Motor heat build-up
0 ... 200 % / [0 ... 100]
2%
67
Asymmetry ≥ 40 %
No asymmetry [0]
Asymmetry (≥ 40 %) [1]
Asymmetry
0 ... 100 % / [0 ...100]
1%
0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200]
0.5 Hz
0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200]
0.5 Hz
503 7
8
Reserved = 0
9
Reserved = 0
10
Reserved = 0
11
Reserved = 0
12 - 13
Reserved = 0
14
Reserved = 0
508 16
Output frequency
17
Reserved = 0
18
Reserved = 0
19
Reserved = 0
509 20
21
Line frequency
Reserved = 0
510 22 - 23
Phase-to-phase voltage UL1-L2 (rms)
0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
511
24 - 25
Phase-to-phase voltage UL2-L3 (rms)
0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
512 26 - 27
Phase-to-phase voltage UL3-L1 (rms)
0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
513 28 - 31
Phase current IL1 (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ... 2, 000 ,000]
0.01 A
514 32 - 35
Phase current IL2 (rms)
0 ... 20 ,000 A / [0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
515 36 - 39
Phase current IL3 (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ... 2 ,000, 000]
0.01 A
516 40 - 41
Electronics supply voltage
0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
517 42
Heatsink temperature
-40 ... 127 °C/ [-40 ... 127]
1 °C
518 43
Contact block temperature
0 ... 250 °C/ [0 ... 250]
1 °C
519 44 - 45
Remaining cool-down time of the
contact block
0 ... 1 ,800 s / [0 ... 18, 000]
0.1 s
520 46 - 47
Remaining time for tripping of the
thermal motor model
0 ... 10, 000 s / [0 ... 10, 000]
1s
521 48 - 51
Output power
0 ... 2 ,147, 483 W / [0 ... 21 ,474 ,830] 0.1 W
522 52 - 63
Reserved = 0
Table 8-27: Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-56
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.12 Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Value range / [coding]
Increment
Comment
Statistics
609
608
0
Motor current Imax
1
Reserved = 0
2
Last trigger current IA (%)
4
603
8 - 11
Operating hours - device
Number of starts motor right
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
0 ... 1, 000 % / [0 ... 320]
3.125 %
0 ...
232
0 ...
232
232
32
-1 s / [0 ... 2 -1]
1s
32
1
32
1
-1 / [0 ... 2 -1]
604
12 - 15
Number of starts motor left
0 ...
605
16 - 17
Number of overload trips
0 ... 65 ,535 / [0 ... 65, 535]
18
Reserved = 0
19
Reserved = 0
607
20
Motor current Imax (rms)
0 ... 20 ,000 A / [0 ... 2, 000 ,000] 0.01 A
606
24
Last trigger current IA (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ...2, 000 ,000]
602
28
Operating hours - motor
-1 / [0 ... 2 -1]
0 ...
232-1
232-1
1
0.01 A
s / [0 ...
232-1]
1s
s / [0 ...
232-1]
1s
611
32
Operating hours - motor current
18 ... 49.9 % x Ie(max)
0 ...
612
36
Operating hours - motor current
50 ... 89.9 % x Ie(max)
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232-1]
1s
613
40
Operating hours - motor current
90 ... 119.9 % x Ie(max)
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232-1]
1s
614
44
Operating hours - motor current
120 ... 1,000 % x Ie(max)
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232-1]
1s
615
48
Reserved = 0
616
50
Number of contact block
overload trips
0 ... 232-1 / [0 ... 232-1]
1
617
52
Reserved = 0
618
54
Reserved = 0
619
56
Reserved = 0
620
60
Number of braking stops
0 ... 232-1 / [0 ... 232-1]
1
621
622
623
624
64
68
72
Number of starts - output 1
Number of starts - output 2
Number of starts - output 3
76
Number of starts - output 4
80
Reserved = 0
84
Reserved = 0
88
Reserved = 0
89
Reserved = 0
0 ...
232-1
0 ...
232-1
0 ... 2
0 ...
32-1
232-1
8-bit current
format
/ [0 ...
232-1]
1
/ [0 ...
232-1]
1
/ [0 ...
232-1]
1
/ [0 ...
232-1]
1
Table 8-28: Data set 95 - reading the statistics data
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-57
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.13 Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Value range / [coding]
Increment
Comment
Maximum pointer
656
4
Phase current IL1 min (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
657
5
Phase current IL2 min (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
658
6
Phase current IL3 min (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
7
Reserved = 0
653
8
Phase current IL1 max (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
654
9
Phase current IL2 max (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
655
10
Phase current IL3 max (%)
0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255]
3.125 %
In bypass operation
11
Reserved = 0
652
12
Maximum
tripping current IA max (%)
0 ... 1, 000 % /
[0 ... 320]
3.125 %
Current during switch-off due
to error
651
14
Number of motor overload
trips
0 ... 65, 535 /
[0 ... 65, 535]
1
Motor protection, temperature
sensor, stalling
659
16
Maximum
tripping current IA max (rms)
0 ... 20 ,000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
Current during switch-off due
to error
660
20
Phase current IL1 min (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000, 000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
661
24
Phase current IL2 min (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
662
28
Phase current IL3 min (rms)
0 ... 20 ,000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
663
32
Phase current IL1 max (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000, 000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
664
36
Phase current IL2 max (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
665
40
Phase current IL3 max (rms)
0 ... 20, 000 A /
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
0.01 A
In bypass operation
666
44
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL1 - L2min (rms)
0 ... 1 ,500 V /
[0 ... 15 ,000]
0.1 V
667
46
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL2 - L3min (rms)
0 ... 1,500 V /
[0 ... 15,000]
0.1 V
668
48
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL3 - L1min (rms)
0 ... 1 ,500 V /
[0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
669
50
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL1 - L2max (rms)
0 ... 1 ,500 V /
[0 ... 15 ,000]
0.1 V
670
52
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL2 - L3max (rms)
0 ... 1, 500 V /
[0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
671
54
Phase-to-phase voltage
UL3 - L1max (rms)
0 ... 1 ,500 V /
[0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
672
56
Electronics supply voltage
UNS min (rms)
0 ... 1 ,500 V /
[0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
Reset to 0 after loss of phase
or switch-off of the main
voltage.
Reset to zero during "Power
on".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-58
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Value range / [coding]
Increment
Comment
Maximum pointer
673
58
Electronics supply voltage
UNS max (rms)
0 ... 1, 500 V /
[0 ... 15, 000]
0.1 V
674
60
Maximum heatsink
temperature
1 ... -40 °C / [40 ... 127]
1 °C
675
61
Maximum contact block
temperature rise
0 ... 250 % / [0 ... 250]
1%
676
62
Minimum line frequency
0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200]
0.5 Hz
677
63
Maximum line frequency
0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200]
0,5 Hz
678
64
Operating hours - motor
current = 18 ... 49.9 % x le
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 2321]
1s
679
68
Operating hours - motor
current = 50 ... 89.9 % x le
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 2321]
1s
680
72
Operating hours - motor
current = 90 ... 119.9 % x le
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 2321]
1s
681
76
Operating hours - motor
current = 120 ... 1,000 % x le
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 2321]
1s
682
80
Operating hours - device
0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 2321]
1s
84
Reserved = 0
85
Reserved = 0
During network failure or
loss of phase = 0
Table 8-29: Data set 96 - reading the maximum pointer
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-59
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.14 Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification
ByteBit
ID No.
Value
Comment
Preamble
0
Coordination
1-3
Reserved = 0
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Device identification (TF)
*)
901
4 - 11
...
Time stamp
902
12 - 31
SIEMENS AG
Manufacturer
903
32 - 55
904
56
0x01
Device family: load feeder
905
57
0x01
Device sub-family: Soft starters
906
58
0x01
Device class: e.g. direct on line starter
907
59
0x03
System: SIRIUS 3RW44
908
60
0x46
Function group
909
61
0x00
Reserved = 0
910
62 - 77
911
78 - 81
e.g. E001
HW version (byte 0 to byte 3)
82
0x00
ID number (byte 0) (3RW44)
83
0x00
ID number (byte 1) (3RW44)
84
0x80
ID number (byte 2) (3RW44)
85
0xDE
ID number (byte 3) (3RW44)
86 - 87
0x00
Reserved = 0
88 - 95
...
Service number
96
0x00
Reserved = 0
97
0x00
Reserved = 0
98
0x00
Reserved = 0
99
0x00
Reserved = 0
912
915
Order number
Short product description
Table 8-30: Data set 100 - reading the device identification
*) Time stamp: Time of the initialization with the factory settings in the factory
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-60
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Object
name
id_date
Object
length
8 byte
Bits
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
215
214
213
212
211
210
29
28
2
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
3
res
res
25
24
23
22
21
20
0 to 59 minutes
4
SU
res
res
24
23
22
21
20
0 to 23 hours
SU: 0: Normal time, 1: Daylight
saving time
22
21
20
24
23
22
21
20
1 to 31 days
5
24
23
22
21
20
1 to 12 months
Octet
5
6
0 to 59, 999 milliseconds
1 to 7 ; 1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday
res
res
2
7
res
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
0 to 99 years; 0 = 2,000
8
res
res
res
res
res
res
res
res
Reserved
Table 8-31: Coding for time stamp
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-61
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.15 Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3
ByteBit
Value
Comment
Preamble
ID
No.
0
Coordination
1-3
Reserved = 0
ByteBit
Meaning
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Only for
data set
131
Value range [coding]
Factor
120
4-7
Device function_2
x
1
8 - 11
Device function_1
x
130
12
Rated operating current Ie
3
160
Load type
x
3-phase [0]
4
161
Protection against voltage failure
x
• No [0]
• Yes [1]
162-7
Reserved = 0
136
17
Prewarning limit - motor heat build-up
x
0 ... 95 % [0 ... 19]
5
180-2
Response to overload - thermal motor
model
x
• Tripping without restart [0]
• Tripping with restart [1]
• Warning [2]
183-7
Reserved = 0
190-4
Tripping class
x
•
•
•
•
•
•
195-7
Reserved = 0
7
20
Pre-charge time
x
60 ... 1 ,800 s [2 ... 60]
30 s
8
21
Idle time
x
0 ... 255 s [0 ... 255]
1s
137
22-23
Prewarning limit - remaining time for
tripping
x
0 ... 500 s [0 ... 500]
1s
10
240-1
Response to overload - temperature sensor x
242-3
Reserved = 0
244-6
Temperature sensor
6
9
0 ... 2 ,000 A [0 ... 200, 000]
x
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
0.01 A
5%
5 (10a) [3]
10 [0]
15 [4]
20 [1]
30 [2]
OFF [15]
• Tripping without
restart [0]
• Tripping with restart [1]
• Warning [2]
• Deactivated [0]
• Thermo click [1]
• PTC - type A [2]
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-62
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Only for
data set
131
Value range [coding]
Factor
247
Temperature sensor monitoring
25 -26
Reserved = 0
15
28
Minimum current limit value
18.75 ... 100 % [6 ... 32]
3.125 %
16
29
Maximum current limit value
50 ... 150 % [16 ... 48]
3.125 %
30 - 31
Reserved = 0
320-5
Reserved = 0
326
Response to current limit value violation
327
Reserved = 0
330-1
Reserved = 0
332
Response to overload - contact block
334-7
Reserved = 0
12
14
140
21
34
0-2
Asymmetric limit value
x
• No [0]
• Yes [1]
x
• Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
x
• Tripping without
restart [0]
• Tripping with restart [1]
x
30 ... 60 % [3 ... 6]
343-5
Reserved = 0
20
346
Response to asymmetry
x
• Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
22
347
Response to ground fault
x
• Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
35 - 44
Reserved = 0
45
Braking torque
46 - 47
Reserved = 0
48
Start voltage
49
Reserved = 0
42
50
167
510-3
47
40
10 %
20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20]
5%
20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20]
5%
Current limiting value
• 3RW44 2, 3, 4:
125 ... 550 % [40 ... 176]
• 3RW44 5:
125 ... 500 % [40 ... 160]
• 3RW44 6:
125 ... 450 % [40 ... 144]
3.125 %
Starting mode
•
•
•
•
•
Direct on line [0]
Voltage ramp [1]
Torque control [2]
Motor heating [3]
Voltage ramp + current limiting
[5]
• Torque control + current limiting
[6]
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-63
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Only for
data set
131
Value range [coding]
168
514-7
Stopping mode
35
52 - 53
Substitute value
54 - 55
Reserved = 0
56
0-5
Reserved = 0
36
56
6
Group diagnosis
x
• Disable [0]
• Enable [1]
34
567
Response to CPU/master STOP
x
• Switch substitute value [0]
• Retain last value [1]
57 - 75
Reserved = 0
26
76
Input 1 - Action
x
• No action (default) [0]
• Group warning [5]
• Manual operation local
operating mode [6]
• Emergency start [7]
• Slow speed [10]
• Quick stop [11]
• Trip reset [12]
• Motor RIGHT with PS1 [16]
• Motor LEFT with PS1 [17]
• Motor RIGHT with PS2 [18]
• Motor LEFT with PS2 [19]
• Motor RIGHT with PS3 [20]
• Motor LEFT with PS3 [21]
28
77
Input 2 - Action (refer to Input 1 - Action)
x
30
78
Input 3 - Action (refer to Input 1 - Action)
x
32
79
Input 4 - Action (refer to Input 1 - Action)
x
80 - 95
Reserved = 0
•
•
•
•
•
•
Factor
Coasting down [0]
Voltage ramp [1]
Torque control [2]
Pump stop [3]
DC braking [4]
Combined braking [5]
x
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-64
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Meaning
Only for
data set
131
Factor
163
96
Output 1 - Action
164
97
Output 2 - Action (refer to Output 1 - Action) x
165
98
Output 3 - Action (refer to Output 1 - Action) x
166
99
Output 4 - Action
100 111
Reserved = 0
116
112
Breakaway time
0 ... 2 s [0 ... 200]
0.01 s
117
113
Breakaway voltage
40 ... 100 % [8 ... 20]
5%
169
114 115
Maximum starting time
0 ... 1, 000 s [0 ... 10, 000]
0.1 s
170
116 117
Starting time
0 ... 360 s [0 ... 3,600]
0.1 s
171
118 119
Stopping time
0 ... 360 s [0 ... 3,600]
0.1 s
172
120
Start torque
10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20]
5%
118
121
Limiting torque
20 ... 200 % [4 ... 40]
5%
173
122
Stopping torque
10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20]
5%
123
Reserved = 0
124
Reserved = 0
125
Motor thermal capacity
1 ... 100 % [1 ... 100]
1%
126 129
Reserved = 0
130
Dynamic braking torque
20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20]
5%
119
178
x
Value range [coding]
• No action (default) [0]
• Control source PIO-DO 1.0
output 1 [1]
• Control source PIO-DO 1.1
output 2 [2]
• Control source input 1 [6]
• Control source input 2 [7]
• Control source input 3 [8]
• Control source input 4 [9]
• Run up [10]
• Operation / bridging [11]
• Stopping [12]
• On-time motor [13]
• Control command MOTOR ON
[14]
• Fan [15]
• DC braking contactor [16]
• Device - ON [18]
• Group warning [31]
• Group error [32]
• Bus error [33]
• Device error [34]
• Ready for motor on [38]
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-65
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
ID
No.
ByteBit
Only for
data set
131
Meaning
Value range [coding]
Factor
43
131
Slow speed factor - clockwise rotation
3 ... 21 [3 ... 21]
1
198
132
Slow speed factor - counter-clockwise
rotation
3 ... 21 [3 ... 21]
1
44
133
Slow torque - clockwise rotation
20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20]
5%
199
134
Slow torque - counter-clockwise rotation
20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20]
5%
135 137
Reserved = 0
Table 8-32: Data sets 131, 141, 151 - technology parameters 2: reading/writing Set 1, 2, 3
Relations
• Maximum current limit value > minimum current limit value
• DC braking can only be selected when the "DC braking contactor" function is
assigned to an output.
• Max. starting time ≥ starting time
• Limiting torque > start torque
8.12.16 Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3
ByteBit
Value
Comment
Preamble
ID No.
104
113
0
Coordination
1-3
Reserved = 0
ByteBit
Meaning
4-9
Reserved = 0
10 - 11
Rated operating speed
12 - 18
Reserved = 0
19 - 20
Rated operating torque
21 - 63
Reserved = 0
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Value range [coding]
Factor
500 ... 3,600 rpm [500 ... 3,600]
1 rpm
0 ... 65,535 Nm [0 ... 65, 535]
1 Nm
Table 8-33: Data sets 132, 142, 152 - technology parameters 3: reading/writing Set 1, 2, 3
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-66
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.17 Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module
ByteBit
Value
Comment
Preamble
ID No.
0
Coordination
1-3
Reserved = 0
ByteBit
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Meaning
Value range [coding]
4
Reserved = 0
179
80-3
Language
•
•
•
•
•
•
181
84-7
Lighting brightness
• Normal [0]
• Off with time delay [4]
• Off [5]
180
9
Contrast display
0 ... 100 % [0 ... 20]
Lighting response to fault
•
•
•
•
Unchanged [0]
On [1]
Blinking [2]
Flickering [3]
•
•
•
•
Unchanged [0]
On [1]
Blinking [2]
Flickering [3]
0-3
Factor
English [0]
German [1]
French [2]
Spanish [3]
Italian [4]
Portuguese [5]
5%
182
10
183
104-7
Lighting response to warning
11
Reserved = 0
184
12
Reaction time keys
10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20]
5%
185
13
Auto repeat speed
10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20]
5%
186
14
Auto repeat time
10 ... 250 ms [2 ... 50]
5 ms
187
15
O&M keys - activity monitoring time
0 ... 1,800 s [0 ... 60]
30 s
16 - 19
Reserved = 0
Table 8-34: Data set 133 - technology parameters 4: O&M module
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-67
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.18 Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters
This data set is only meant for devices with direct access to the field bus
(e.g. PROFIBUS DP) for the allocation of communication parameters.
ID
ByteBit
No.
Communication
parameters
Value range
[coding]
Increment
Default
setting
Preamble
200 0
Coordination
1
Reserved1
2-3
Reserved2
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Communication
210 4
Station address
1 ...126
211 5
Baud rate
12, 000 kBd [0]
6 ,000 kBd [1]
3, 000 kBd [2]
1 ,500 kBd [3]
500 kBd [4]
187.5 kBd [5]
93.75 kBd [6]
45.45 kBd [7]
19.2 kBd [8]
9.6 kBd [9]
Available [10..14]
Automatic baud rate
detection [15]
6 - 11
1
126
Reserved = 0
Table 8-35: Data set 160 - reading/writing communication parameters
Note
3RW44 soft starters signal the current baud rate while reading. During writing,
the value entered is ignored, as the baud rate is always automatically detected
by the soft starter.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-68
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.12.19 Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments
You can store any text with up to 121 characters (max. 121 byte), e.g. for system
documentation, in the soft starter.
ByteBit
Communication
parameters
Value range
[coding]
Preamble
0
Coordination
1
Reserved1
2-3
Reserved2
Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
Comment
4 - 124
Comment data
Table 8-36: Data set 165 - reading/writing comments
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8-69
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
8-70
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9
Circuit Examples
Chapter
Subject
Page
9.1
Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits
9-2
9.1.1
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys
9-2
9.1.2
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC
9-3
9.1.3
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for
Device Types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25
9-4
9.1.4
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for
Device Types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47
9-5
9.1.5
3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit
9-6
9.1.6
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor
9-7
9.1.7
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow
Speed Function in both Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set
9-8
9.1.8
Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local (e.
g. at the Control Cabinet)
9-9
9.1.9
3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main
Contactors with one Parameter Set without Soft Stop
9-10
9.1.10 Reversing Operation with Soft Stop
9-11
9.1.11 Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and 2
Parameter Sets
9-12
9.1.12 Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets
9-13
9.1.13 Parallel Starting of 3 Motors
9-14
9.1.14 Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets
9-16
9.1.15 Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake
9-18
9.1.16 Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with
Safety Relay 3TK2823 and 3RW44
9-19
9.1.17 Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start
9-21
9.1.18 Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a
Standard Circuit)
9-22
9.1.19 Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor
9-23
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-1
Circuit Examples
9.1
Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits
9.1.1 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys
Main circuit
Control circuit
Option 1a:
Standard circuit with circuit breaker and SITOR fuse
(pure semiconductor protection)
/ 13(9$&+]
/
/
13(9$&+]
/
)
37&W\SH$
RU
7KHUPRFOLFN
6
6WDUW
I >>
6,725
RSWLRQ
)
/
/
4
/
$
/
/
,1
,1
6
5HVHW
˽
5HVHW
I >>
1RDFWLRQ
I >>
1RDFWLRQ
4
0RWRUULJKW
36
6
6WRS
,1
,1
3(
7
7
˽
4
$ 16%BE
7
0
3(
7
7
9
8:
0
a
1
&RPPDQG
0RWRURQ
1R
DFWLRQ
1R
DFWLRQ
*URXSHUURU
16%BE
3(
Alternative branch layout in a standard circuit
Main circuit
Option 1b:
Standard circuit with all-range fuse
(line and semiconductor protection)
/ 13(9$& +]
/
/
Option 1c:
Standard circuit with line and SITOR fuse (pure
semiconductor protection)
/
/
/
13(9$&+]
)
)
6,725
RSWLRQ
)
/
/
/
/
/
7
7
7
7
0
7
7
9
8:
0
a
3(
16%BE
4
4
16%BE
/
0
9
8:
0
a
3(
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.2 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC
Main circuit
Control circuit
Standard circuit with optional main contactor
Activation of an optional main contactor and activation via PLC
13(9$&+]
13(9$&+]
/
9'&
)
4
3/&RXWSXWV
6WDUW 0
4
/
2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG
SRWHQWLDOIUHH
4
$
/
/
,1
,1
37&W\SH$
RU
7KHUPRFOLFN
5HVHW
6,725
RSWLRQ
/
5HVHW
I >>
)
/
3/&LQSXWV
1RDFWLRQ
I >>
0RWRUULJKW
36
I >>
1RDFWLRQ
/
/
/
,1
,1
2QWLPH
16%BE
7
0
7
7
9
8:
0
a
$
3(
4
3(
7
7
˽
3(
4
˽
1
2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG
SRWHQWLDOIUHH
1R
DFWLRQ
1R
*URXSHUURU
DFWLRQ
8
16%BE
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
2) Caution: risk of restart!
The start command (e.g. via PLC) must be reset when a group fault occurs, since an automatic restart is
executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly applies to
motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-3
Circuit Examples
9.1.3 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking3) Stopping Function for Device Types
3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25
Main circuit
/
/
/
Control circuit
13(9$&+]
(
13(9$&+]
9'&
3/&RXWSXWV
)
3/&LQSXWV
4
I >>
I >>
6WDUW 0
I >>
5HVHW
/
4
4 $
7
7
,1
,1
,1
4
'&EUDNH
FRQWDFWRU 1RDFWLRQ
3(
9
0 8:
0
3(
1
˽
,1
7
7
˽
2Q
WLPH
$
16%B
/
3(
7
4
a
/
37&W\SH$
RU
7KHUPRFOLFN
5HVHW
/
1RDFWLRQ
/
0RWRUULJKW
36
)
1RDFWLRQ
4
6,725
RSWLRQ
*URXSHUURU
8
4
16%BE
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
2)
2) Caution: risk of restart!
The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset command is issued, as an automatic
restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly
applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
3) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.
If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used.
For types, refer to the "Branch component layout (standard circuit)" table on page 10-21.
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
Output 2 must be set to "DC braking contactor".
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.4 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking3) Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 26
to 3RW44 66
Main circuit
/
/
/
Control circuit
13(9$&+]
/
13(9$&+]
9'&
)
3/&RXWSXWV
3/&LQSXWV
4
I >>
I >>
6WDUW 0
I >>
5HVHW
4
.
7
7
16%B
4
7
4
0
.
4
9
8:
0
a
3(
4
4
4
4 3(
$
/ /
3(
2Q
WLPH
$
,1
,1
'&EUDNH
FRQWDFWRU . 37&W\SH$
RU
7KHUPRFOLFN
5HVHW
/
1RDFWLRQ
/
1RDFWLRQ
/
0RWRUULJKW
6,725
RSWLRQ
)
36
.
,1
1R
DFWLRQ
˽
,1
7
7
˽
*URXSHUURU
8
1
16%BE
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
2)
2) Caution: risk of restart!
The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset command is issued, since an automatic
restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly
applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
3) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.
If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used. For types, refer to
the "Branch component layout (standard circuit)" table on page 10-21.
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
Output 2 must be set to "DC braking contactor".
4) K4 auxiliary relay, e.g.:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-5
Circuit Examples
9.1.5 3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit
Control circuit Option 1: Activation via PLC
Main circuit Option 1a:
13(9$&+]
13(9$&+]
/
9'&
)
4
3/&RXWSXWV
6WDUW 0
6,725
)
4
/
7
7
0
8:
0
a
:9
8
3(
/
/
,1
,1
5HVHW
,1
,1
˽
7
7
˽
2QWLPH
$
9
16%BE
$
37&W\SH$
RU
7KHUPRFOLFN
3(
/
4
7
5HVHW
I >>
4
/
3/&LQSXWV
1RDFWLRQ
I >>
0RWRUULJKW
36
I >>
1RDFWLRQ
/
/
/
3(
4
1
2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG
SRWHQWLDOIUHH
1R
DFWLRQ
1R
*URXSHUURU
DFWLRQ
8
16%BE
Reversed direction of rotation in an inside delta circuit
Main circuit Option 1b:
/
/
/
13(9$&+]
Notice
Observe the wiring suggestions for the inside delta circuit on the main
circuit page. Faulty connection may cause breakdowns.
4
I >>
I >>
I >>
4
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data,
pages 10-12 to 10-16.
6,725
)
/
/
/
7
7
7
16%BE
4
0
3(
9
8:
0
2) Caution: risk of restart!
The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset
command is issued, as an automatic restart is executed when a start
command is pending after the reset command is issued. This
particularly applies to motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
a
:9
8
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.6 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor
Control circuit
Main circuit
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
4 $
/
/
3(
,1
1RDFWLRQ
,1 ,1 ,1
4
I >>
I >>
I >>
6,725
RSWLRQ )
˽
7
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
7
˽
$
3(
1
13(9$&+]
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
9'&RXW
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
6
212))
$FNQRZ
OHGJH
2QWLPH
4
*URXSHUURU
)
/
9
8:
0
a
0
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
3(
Note
With this circuit type, the motor start may be delayed by up to 5 s after the start command, due to the internal
run times of the soft starter. Coasting down is the only possible stopping mode.
Notice
After the control supply voltage has been switched off and before restarting, the
device must be allowed to cool down for at least 30 s, as this influences the
effectiveness of the inherent protection of the soft starter.
This type of circuit is not recommended for higher switching frequencies as the
integrated fan cannot idle after the soft starter has been switched off, thus
reducing the switching frequency specified in the technical data.
Us
ON
OFF
>30 s
t
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-7
/
/
,1
,1
.
6WDUWULJKW
6RIWVWDUWVWRS
9'&RXW
6ORZVSHHGPRGH
,1
6
5HVHW
,1
˽
.
8
.
1RDFWLRQ
$
$
8 8
.
6
$
$
8
(QJDJLQJ
FRRUGLQDWH
6WDUW
VZLWFK
ULJKW
VRIWVWDUW HJ
6%.:
1RDFWLRQ
&RQWDFWPXOWLSOLFDWLRQ
$
$
6WDUW
VORZ
OHIW
6WDUW
VORZ
ULJKW
7
6
6
2QWLPH
*URXSHUURU
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
7
˽
4
4
/
/
/
4
0
7
/
6,725
RSWLRQ
)
I >>
0
a
7
3(
I >>
/
8:
9
7
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
Note: parameterization
Set the control input functions to:
IN1: Motor right PS1
IN2: Motor left PS1
IN3: Slow-speed mode
IN4: Trip/reset (factory default)
The slow-speed parameters in Parameter Set 1 must be set. Motor right means rotation in line phase direction, motor left means rotation against the line
phase direction.
Notice
The slow-speed function is not suitable for continuous operation. The motor heating can become unreliable in continuous operation at slow speed.
Caution - risk of restart:
The start command must be reset before a reset command is issued, as an automatic restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset
command is issued. This especially applies to motor protection tripping.
K1, K2, K3 = relays for contact multiplication, e.g. for 230 V AC operation: 3RS 1800-1BP00
1
3(
$
3(
4 $
.
.
VORZ
ULJKW
0RWRUULJKW36
)
13(9$&+]
VORZ
OHIW
0RWRUOHIW36
9-8
7ULS5HVHW
/
Circuit Examples
9.1.7 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow Speed Function in both
Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1
3(
4
/
3URILEXV'3
3(
)
$
$
6
/
/
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
6WDUW6WRS
PDQXDO
RSHUDWLRQORFDO
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
0DQXDORSHUDWLRQORFDO
,1
6
5HVHW
PDQXDO
RSHUDWLRQ
ORFDO
,1
1RDFWLRQ
,1
˽
7
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
7
+
*URXSHUURU
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
4 $
$
4
$
$
2QWLPH
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK
0DQXDORSHUDWLRQORFDO
6
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
13(9$&+]
)DXOW
8
4
1RDFWLRQ
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4
0
7
/
4
6,725
RSWLRQ )
I >>
0
a
3(
7
7
9
8:
/
I >>
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
˽
/
/
/
Circuit Examples
9.1.8 Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local
(e. g. at the Control Cabinet)
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-9
1
3(
4
3(
)
$
$
9'&RXW
/
,1
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
/
4
1RDFWLRQ
4
1RDFWLRQ
,1
6
5HVHW
,1
7ULS5HVHW
13(9$&+]
˽
7
+
*URXS
HUURU
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
7
˽
4
2QWLPH
2QWLPH
4
4
$
$
8
4
4
$
$
4
6
0RWRU
OHIW
4 4 4
1RDFWLRQ
6 0RWRUVWRS
6
0RWRU
ULJKW
)DXOW
/
0RWRUULJKW
9-10
0RWRUOHIW
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
8
4
4
/
/
/
4
0
7
/
4
6,725
RSWLRQ )
I >>
0
a
7
3(
I >>
/
9
8:
7
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
Circuit Examples
9.1.9 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main Contactors with one
Parameter Set without Soft Stop
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1
3(
4
$
$
3(
)
/
/
.
13(9$&+]
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
,1
6
5HVHW
,1
7
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
˽
,1 7
4
+
$
$
$
4 $
4 $
8
4
1RDFWLRQ
8
4 4 6
4
0RWRU
OHIW
4 $
4
6
0RWRU
ULJKW
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
)DXOW
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
2QWLPH
0RWRUULJKW
5HVHWVWDQGDUG
2QWLPH
0RWRUOHIW
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6
.
6
0RWRU
VWRS
0RWRU 0RWRU
ULJKW OHIW
6
$
$
.
4
8
4
0
7
/
4
I >>
7
7
0
a
9
8:
/
3(
I >>
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
4
/
/
/
˽
/
Circuit Examples
9.1.10Reversing Operation with Soft Stop
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-11
$
3(
$
9'&RXW
/
,1
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
/
,1 7
˽
7
+
*URXSHUURU
IL[HG
DOORFDWLRQ
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRUSURWHFWLRQ
,1
1RDFWLRQ
6
5HVHW
7ULS5HVHW
$
$
$
$
+
+
,QSXW
1RDFWLRQ
$
4
6
6WDUW
KLJK
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
4
$
$
$
4
6
6WDUW
ORZ
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
6
0RWRU
VWRS
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
3(
1
4
4
0RWRUULJKW36
4
)DXOW
0RWRUUXQVDW
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
4
0DLQFRQWDFWRUIRU
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
,QSXW
0RWRUUXQVDW
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
)
8
.
$
$
.
8
4
4
$
$
8
8:
9
0
a
0 8:
9
7
7
7
4
4
/
3(
4
I >>
/
I >>
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
4
/
/
/
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRUIRU
VZLWFKLQJGHOD\
SLFNXSGHOD\
PV
13(9$&+]
0DLQFRQWDFWRUIRU
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
9-12
˽
/
Circuit Examples
9.1.11 Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and
2 Parameter Sets
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
3(
3(
1
4
$
$
/
/
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
4 4
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
6
5HVHW
,QSXW
1RDFWLRQ
4
.
6
6WDUWKLJK
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
$
$
4
6
6WDUWORZ
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
6
0RWRU
VWRS
$
$
$
+
+
+
$
$
$
7
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRUSURWHFWLRQ
˽
,1 ,1 7
4
*URXSHUURU
IL[HG
DOORFDWLRQ
)DXOW
1RDFWLRQ
0RWRU
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
7ULS5HVHW
,QSXW
0RWRU
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
)
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
/
8
.
$
$
.
6ZLWFKLQJGHOD\
PVGHOD\
8
4
4
4
$
$
8
4
4
$
$
7
7
7
8
0
8:
9
0
a
9
8:
/
3(
4
I >>
/
I >>
/
4
4
I >>
13(9$&+]
4
/
/
/
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
13(9$&+]
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
˽
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
Circuit Examples
9.1.12Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-13
Circuit Examples
9.1.13Parallel Starting of 3 Motors
Control circuit
2QWLPH
)
6
5HVHW
4
/
/
,1
7ULS5HVHW
,1
,1
3(
7
5HVHW
VWDQGDUG
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
6WDUW
VWDQGDUG
+
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
1
)
˽
$
3(
7
)
) ) )
,1
)
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
$
$
)DXOW
$
36
6WDUWULJKW
4
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
4
$
$
6
6WDUW
6WRS
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
13(9$&+]
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
/
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
Notice
The rated output of the 3RW44 to be configured must be at least as high as the sum of the motor rated
outputs.
The loads should have similar mass moments of inertia and torque curves.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-14
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
Parallel Starting of 3 Motors
Main circuit
/
/
/
13(9$&+]
4
I >>
I >>
I >>
6,725
RSWLRQ
)
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
0
a
0
3(
)
9
8:
0
a
0
3(
9
8:
˽
9
8:
˽
0
)
˽
)
0
a
3(
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
Notice
The rated output of the 3RW44 to be configured must be at least as high as the sum of the motor rated
outputs.
The loads should have similar mass moments of inertia and torque curves.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-15
1
3(
4
$
3(
$ /
/
0RWRUULJKW36
,1
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
4
4
6
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
4
) )
7
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
˽
,1 7
7ULS5HVHW
+
)
)
$
$
4
$
$
8
4
$
$
8
4
4
4
4
$
$
6 4
0RWRU
6WDUW
4
4
4 4
6
0RWRU
6WRS
)
4
4
6 4
0RWRU
6WDUW
4
6
0RWRU
6WRS
)DXOW
5:RU
PRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
000
WULSSHG
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG
4
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
)
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
8
4
$
$
4 4
2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG
13(9$&+]
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
/
8
4
4
4
4
$
$
6 4
0RWRU
6WDUW
4
6
0RWRU
6WRS
)
Note
In the case of increased operating sequences, the 3RW44 should be dimensioned at least one capacity
level higher than the highest connected motor output.
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
8
4
$
$
4 4
2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG
9-16
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
8
Circuit Examples
9.1.14Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
Circuit Examples
Soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets (deactivate soft stop and 3RW44 motor
protection)
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
)
/
/
)
)
)
4
4
4
/
4
7
7
4
4
)
)
)
9
0 8:
0
a
˽
˽
9
0 8:
4
9
0 8:
0
a
3(
˽
7
0
a
3(
3(
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
Note
In the case of increased operating sequences, the 3RW44 should be dimensioned at least one capacity level
higher than the highest connected motor output.
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
9-17
Circuit Examples
3(
9.1.15Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake
0
a
9
8:
$
$
0
7
7
4
4
7
/
/
/
I >>
I >>
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
%UDNH
I >>
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
,1
,1
,1
1
3(
$
4 $
3(
)
/
6WDUWULJKW
36
6
6WDUW
6WRS
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
13(9$&+]
,1
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
/
/
5HVHWVWDQGDUG
6
5HVHW
7
˽
4
7
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
+
$
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
)DXOW
$
2QWLPH
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-18
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
0
<
<
$
<
2Q5HVHW
6
4
$
<
4
<
<
4
6
7.&%
1
3(
$
3(
4 $
/
6WDUW6WRS
5:
/
4
4
,1
6
,1
6
,1
6
˽
,1 7
4 7
+
$
$
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
(0(5*(1&<6723
4
Notice
If a stopping function has been set (exception: "Coasting down"), a fault message may occur on the soft starter
when the Emergency Off circuit is activated (e.g. "Loss of phase L1/L2/L3" or "No line voltage").
6
6WDUWULJKW
36
4
5HVHW7.
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
)
5HVHW5:
)UHHO\
SURJUDPPDEOH
/9'&
5HVHW
VWDQGDUG
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
13(9$&+]
2QWLPH
)DXOW
5:
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
+
4
$
$
(0(5*(1&<
6723
/
Circuit Examples
9.1.16Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with Safety Relay 3TK2823
and 3RW44
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-19
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
Circuit Examples
Emergency stop monitoring according to EN 954-1 category 4 with safety relay 3TK2823 and 3RW44
Main circuit
/
/
/
13(9$&+]
4
I >>
I >>
I >>
4
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
˽
0
9
8:
0
a
3(
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
Notice
If a stopping function has been set (exception: "Coasting down"), a fault message may occur on the soft
starter when the Emergency Off circuit is activated (e.g."Loss of phase L1/L2/L3" or "No line voltage").
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-20
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3(
1
4
3( $
$
6
/
/
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
6
5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
,1 ,1
1RDFWLRQ
6WDUW6WRS
VRIWVWDUWHUV
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
˽
+
7
*URXSHUURU
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
,1 7
4
$
$
2QWLPH
)DXOW
2QWLPH
)
4
6
6WDUW6WRS
GLUHFWVWDUW
6RIWVWDUW 6
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK
1RDFWLRQ
13(9$&+]
4
/
/
/
$
$
8
'LUHFWVWDUW
'LUHFWVWDUW
FRQWDFWRU
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4
0
7
/
I >>
7
7
0
a
9
8:
/
3(
I >>
/
I >>
13(9$&+]
˽
/
4
Circuit Examples
9.1.17Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-21
1
3(
4
3( $
$
/
/
6WDUW
6WRS
6RIW
VWDUWHU
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
,1
5HVHW
6
,1
1RDFWLRQ
6
7
+
*URXSHUURU
IL[HG
DOORFDWLRQ
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
˽
,1 7
7ULS5HVHW
$
$
)
.
$
$
8
4
.
4
6WDUW6WRS 6
VWDUGHOWDVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
$
$
8
4
4
$
$
4
6
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK 6RIWVWDUW
6WDUGHOWDVWDUW
2QWLPH
6WDUGHOWD
VZLWFKLQJWLPH
4
)DXOW
2QWLPH
13(9$&+]
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
/
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
8
4
4
4
4
$
4
0
8
4
$
7
/
4
4
7
7
0
a
9
8:
/
I >>
/
I >>
$
$
8
,QWHUORFN
8:
9
I >>
13(9$&+]
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
˽
9-22
%\SDVVFRQWDFWRU
DQGLQWHUORFN
6RIWVWDUWVWDU
GHOWDVWDUW
/
/
/
3(
4
4
4
Circuit Examples
9.1.18Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a Standard Circuit)
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
1
3(
$
3( $
4
/
/
,1
0RWRUULJKW36
,1
1RDFWLRQ
$FNQRZOHGJH
6
,1
1RDFWLRQ
4
7
*URXSHUURU
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
4
2QWLPH
$
$
8
4
$
$
4
8
7
$
$
4
$
$
8
4
$
$
8
0
0
a
9
8:
7
7
7
4
4
/
)
4
8 9 :
8 9 :
4
3(
I >>
/
I >>
/
4
6,725
RSWLRQ )
I >>
13(9$&+]
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
6
6WDUW6WRS
IUHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK
6RIWVWDUW 6
$
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU +
SURWHFWLRQ
$
˽
,1 7
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
6RIWVWDUWHU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
4
)DXOW
)
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
DFWLYDWLRQ
/
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
1RDFWLRQ
6RIWVWDUWHU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
/
/
/
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
˽
13(9$&+]
7
Circuit Examples
9.1.19Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-23
Circuit Examples
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
9-24
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10
Chapter
Subject
Page
10.1
Menu Structure
10-2
10.2
Transport and Storage Conditions
10-4
10.3
Technical Data
10-5
10.3.1
Selection and Ordering Data
10-5
10.3.2
Technical Data Power Unit
10-12
10.3.3
Technical Data Control Unit
10-16
10.3.4
Conductor Cross-Sections
10-19
10.3.5
Electromagnetic Compatibility
10-20
10.3.6
Utilization Classes
10-20
10.3.7
Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)
10-21
10.3.8
Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)
10-26
10.3.9
Accessories
10-27
10.3.10
Spare parts
10-28
10.4
Tripping Characteristics
10-29
10.4.1
Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry
10-29
10.4.2
Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry 10-29
10.5
Dimension Drawings
10-30
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-1
General Technical Data
10.1
Menu Structure
Display measured value
ESC
OK
Phase voltages
UL1N
UL2N
UL3N
Phase-to-phase voltages
UL1-L2
UL2-L3
UL3-L1
Blocking voltages
ULT1
ULT2
ULT3
Phase currents
IL1
IL2
IL3
Power
Line frequency
Supply voltage
Heatsink temperature
Motor heat build-up
Remaining time for tripping
Switch off standard display
Status display
ESC
Settings
OK
Device status
Active parameter set
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Type of connection
Unknown/faulty
Star/delta
Inside delta
Direction of rotation
Unknown
Clockwise
Counter-clockwise
Inputs
Status - Inputs
Input 1 - Action
No action
Manual operation
local
Emergency start
Slow speed
Quick stop
Trip reset
Motor right PS1
Motor left PS1 **
Motor right PS2
Motor left PS2 **
Motor right PS3
Motor left PS3 **
Input 2 - Action [...]
Input 3 - Action [...]
Input 4 - Action [...]
Outputs
Status - Outputs
Output 1 - Action
No action
PIO output 1
PIO output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Run up
Bypass operation
Coasting down
On-time motor
Command motor-on
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group error
Bus error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Output 2 - Action [...]
Output 3 - Action [...]
Output 4 - Action [...]
Order number
Firmware information
Version
Date
ESC
OK
Factory
Settings
Parameter set 1
Motor 1
Rated operating current Ie
Rated operating torque
Rated operating speed
Copy motor data to PS2 + 3
Starting settings
Starting mode
Voltage ramp
Voltage ramp + current
limiting
Torque control
Torque control + current
limiting
Direct on line
Motor heating
Start voltage
Start torque
Limiting torque
Starting time
Maximum starting time
Current limiting value
Breakaway voltage
Breakaway time
Motor thermal capacity
Stopping settings
Stopping mode
Coasting down
Torque control
Pump stop
DC braking
Combined braking
Stopping time
Stopping torque
Dynamic braking torque
DC braking torque
Slow speed parameters
Slow speed factor right
Slow speed torque right
Slow speed factor left
Slow speed torque left
Current limit values
Minimum current limit value
Maximum current limit value
Parameter set 2 [...]
Parameter set 3 [...]
Inputs
Input 1 - Action
No action
Manual operation local
Emergency start
Slow speed
Quickstop
Trip Reset
Motor right PS1
Motor left PS1 **
Motor right PS2
Motor left PS2 **
Motor right PS3
Motor left PS3 **
Input 2 - Action [...]
Input 3 - Action [...]
Input 4 - Action [...]
** Possible only in connection with creep speed
Depends on
order
number
0
1,500
x
30 %
10 %
150 %
10 s
0/
deactivated
400 %
40 %
0 ms
20 %
x
10 s
10 %
50 %
50 %
7
50 %
7
50 %
18.75 %
112.50 %
x
No Action
No Action
Trip Reset
Customer
Settings
Factory
Settings
Customer
Settings
Outputs
Output 1 - Action
No action
PIO output 1
PIO output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Run up
Operation / bypass
Coasting down
On-time motor
x
Command motor-on
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group error
Bus error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Output 2 - Action [...]
No Action
Output 3 - Action [...]
No Action
Motor protection
Tripping class
None
CLASS 5 (10a)
CLASS 10
x
CLASS 15
CLASS 20
CLASS 30
Current asymmetry limit value
40 %
Prewarning limit tripping reserve
0s
Prewarning limit motor heat
80 %
build-up
Idle time
0s
Pre-charge time
60 s
Protection against voltage failure
No
Yes
x
Temperature sensor
Deactivated
x
Thermo click
PTC-type A
Display settings
Language
English
x
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Português
Nederlands
Ελληνικά
Türkçe
Русский
中文
Contrast
50 %
Lighting
Brightness
Lighting on
x
Off with time delay
Lighting off
Response to fault
Unchanged
On
Blinking
Flickering
x
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Motor control
Factory
Settings
Response to warning
Unchanged
On
Blinking
Flickering
Reaction time keys
Auto repeat
Time
Speed
Activity monitoring time
Response to ...
Overload - therm. motor model
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
Warning
Overload - temperature sensor
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
Warning
Current limit value violation
Warning
Tripping
Overload - contact block
Tripping without restart
Tripping with restart
Asymmetry
Warning
Tripping
Ground fault
Warning
Tripping
Name
Name
Fieldbus
Fieldbus interface
Off
On
Group diagnosis
Disable
Enable
Behavior on CPU/master-stop
Substitute value
Hold last value
Station address
Baud rate
Substitute value
Motor right
Motor left
Slow speed
Emergency start
Output 1
Output 2
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Lock quickstop
Parameters disabled CPU/Master
Off
On
Saving options
Save settings
Restore settings
Restore basic factory settings
x
60 %
80 ms
80 %
30 s
x
x
x
Customer
Settings
ESC
OK
Motor control via keys
Key control
activate
deactivate
Select parameter set
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Execute control function
Motor right
Motor left **
Slow speed
Emergency start
Output 1
Output 2
Control motor via inputs
Control via inputs
activate
deactivate
Standard control
Automatic / None
Inputs
Keys
x
x
x
x
x
x
126
Statistics
ESC
Safety
OK
Log lists
Device errors
Trips
Events
Maximum pointer
Currents (%)
Phase current L1 min
Phase current L2 min
Phase current L3 min
Phase current L1 max
Phase current L2 max
Phase current L3 max
Currents (rms)
Phase current L1 min
Phase current L2 min
Phase current L3 min
Phase current L1 max
Phase current L2 max
Phase current L3 max
Phase-to-phase voltages
UL1 - L2 min (rms)
UL2 - L3 min (rms)
UL3 - L1 min (rms)
UL1 - L2 max (rms)
UL2 - L3 max (rms)
UL3 - L1 max (rms)
Maximum tripping current IA (%)
Maximum tripping current IA (rms)
Number of overload trips
Minimum line frequency
Maximum line frequency
Max. cooling temperature
Max. contact block temperature
Reset all maximum pointers
Statistics data
Motor current Imax (%)
Motor current Imax (rms)
Last trigger current IA (%)
Last trigger current IA (rms)
Operating hours - device
Operating hours - motor
No. of starts motor right
No. of starts motor left
Number of overload trips
Number of braking stops
No. of starts output 1
No. of starts output 2
No. of starts output 3
No. of starts output 4
ESC
OK
Enter user code
User level
Customer read (> 1000)
Customer write (1000)
Factory Customer
Settings Settings
1000
x
** Possible only in connection with creep speed
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-3
General Technical Data
10.2
Transport and Storage Conditions
Transport and storage conditions
The soft starters comply with the requirements of DIN IEC 721-3-1/HD478.3.1 P1 for
transport and storage conditions. The following data apply to modules that are
transported and stored in their original packing.
Type of condition
Permissible range
Temperature
From -25 °C to +80 °C
Atmospheric pressure
From 700 to 1,060 hPa
Relative humidity
From 10 to 95 %
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10.3
Technical Data
10.3.1 Selection and Ordering Data
Normal starting (CLASS 10) in a standard circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ...600
400 ... 690
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
29
36
47
57
77
93
29
36
47
57
77
93
29
36
47
57
77
93
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated output of three-phase induction motors
for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
kW
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
400 V
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
500 V
kW
—
—
—
—
—
—
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
690 V
kW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30
37
45
55
75
90
A
26
32
42
51
68
82
26
32
42
51
68
82
26
32
42
51
68
82
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
HP
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
230 V
HP
7.5
10
15
15
20
25
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
460 V
HP
15
20
25
30
50
60
15
20
25
30
50
60
15
20
25
30
50
60
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
200
250
250
300
350
400
450
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
75
—
75
—
100
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
500
—
600
—
700
—
750
—
850
—
950
—
75
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
400
400
500
450
600
500
700
600
750
700
850
750
900
850
1100
950
1200
Order No. supplement for type of connection
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
200
250
250
315
355
400
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
710
800
900
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
30
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
200
250
300
350
350
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
575 V
HP
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
25
30
40
50
75
20
25
30
40
50
75
Order No.
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
1
3
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-5
General Technical Data
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
400 ... 690
Rated
operating
current Ie
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated output of three-phase induction motors
for rated operational voltage Ue
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
710
800
900
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
1000
1100
1200
Rated
operating
current Ie
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
75
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
450
500
600
700
750
850
950
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
750
850
900
1100
1200
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
Order No.
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-6
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Heavy starting (CLASS 20) in a standard circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ...600
400 ... 690
A
29
36
47
57
77
29
36
47
57
77
29
36
47
57
77
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
kW
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
400 V
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
15
18.5
22
30
37
15
18.5
22
30
37
500 V
kW
—
—
—
—
—
18.5
22
30
37
45
18.5
22
30
37
45
690 V
kW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30
37
45
55
75
A
26
32
42
51
68
26
32
42
51
68
26
32
42
51
68
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
HP
7.5
10
10
15
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
230 V
HP
7.5
10
15
15
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
460 V
HP
15
20
25
30
50
15
20
25
30
50
15
20
25
30
50
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
200
250
250
300
350
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
60
—
75
—
75
—
100
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
500
—
600
—
700
—
750
—
60
75
75
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
400
400
500
450
600
500
700
600
750
700
850
750
950
60
75
75
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
400
400
500
450
600
500
700
600
750
700
850
750
950
Order No. supplement for type of connection
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
400 ... 690
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
200
250
250
315
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
710
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
710
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
1000
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
25
30
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
200
250
300
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
575 V
HP
—
—
—
—
—
20
25
30
40
50
20
25
30
40
50
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
Order No.
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
3RW44 [email protected]@6
1
3
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@4
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 [email protected]@5
3RW44 36-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 45-@BC@5
3RW44 46-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 54-@BC@5
3RW44 57-@BC@5
3RW44 55-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 34-@BC@6
3RW44 35-@BC@6
3RW44 36-@BC@6
3RW44 43-@BC@6
3RW44 45-@BC@6
3RW44 46-@BC@6
3RW44 47-@BC@6
3RW44 47-@BC@6
3RW44 53-@BC@6
3RW44 53-@BC@6
3RW44 55-@BC@6
3RW44 57-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-7
General Technical Data
Very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in a standard circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ...600
400 ... 690
A
29
36
47
57
29
36
47
57
29
36
47
57
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated output of three-phase induction motors
for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
5.5
15
—
—
7.5
18.5
—
—
11
22
—
—
15
30
—
—
—
15
18.5
—
—
18.5
22
—
—
22
30
—
—
30
37
—
—
15
18.5
30
—
18.5
22
37
—
22
30
45
—
30
37
55
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
26
32
42
51
26
32
42
51
26
32
42
51
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
HP
HP
HP
HP
7.5
7.5
15
—
10
10
20
—
10
15
25
—
15
15
30
—
—
—
15
20
—
—
20
25
—
—
25
30
—
—
30
40
—
—
15
20
—
—
20
25
—
—
25
30
—
—
30
40
Order No. supplement for type of connection
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
400 ... 690
77
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
970
77
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
—
77
93
113
134
162
203
250
313
356
432
551
615
693
780
880
—
18,5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
200
250
250
315
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
—
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
—
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
500
560
630
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
—
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
68
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
68
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
68
82
100
117
145
180
215
280
315
385
494
551
615
693
780
850
20
25
30
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
200
250
300
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
200
250
250
300
350
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
50
—
60
—
75
—
75
—
100
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
500
—
600
—
700
—
750
—
50
50
60
75
75
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
400
400
500
450
600
500
700
600
750
700
850
750
900
50
50
60
75
75
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
400
400
500
450
600
500
700
600
750
700
850
750
900
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
Order No.
3RW44 22-@BC@4
3RW44 24-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 22-@BC@5
3RW44 24-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 22-@BC@6
3RW44 24-@BC@6
3RW44 25-@BC@6
3RW44 25-@BC@6
1
3
3RW44 34-@BC@4
3RW44 35-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 46-@BC@4
3RW44 47-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 55-@BC@4
3RW44 58-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 66-@BC@4
3RW44 34-@BC@5
3RW44 35-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 46-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 55-@BC@5
3RW44 58-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 66-@BC@5
3RW44 34-@BC@6
3RW44 35-@BC@6
3RW44 43-@BC@6
3RW44 43-@BC@6
3RW44 43-@BC@6
3RW44 46-@BC@6
3RW44 47-@BC@6
3RW44 53-@BC@6
3RW44 53-@BC@6
3RW44 53-@BC@6
3RW44 55-@BC@6
3RW44 58-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
3RW44 65-@BC@6
3RW44 66-@BC@6
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-8
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Normal starting (CLASS 10) in an inside delta circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
A
50
62
81
99
133
161
50
62
81
99
133
161
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
15
22
—
—
18.5
30
—
—
22
45
—
—
30
55
—
—
37
75
—
—
45
90
—
—
—
22
30
—
—
30
37
—
—
45
45
—
—
55
55
—
—
75
90
—
—
90
110
—
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
45
55
73
88
118
142
45
55
73
88
118
142
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
HP
HP
HP
HP
10
15
30
—
15
20
40
—
20
25
50
—
25
30
60
—
30
40
75
—
40
50
100
—
—
—
30
40
—
—
40
50
—
—
50
60
—
—
60
75
—
—
75
100
—
—
100
125
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
1680
1864
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
1680
1864
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
60
125
75
150
100
200
125
250
150
300
200
400
200
450
250
600
350
750
400
850
450
950
500
1050
600
1200
650
1300
750
1500
850
1700
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
600
—
750
—
850
—
950
—
1050
—
1200
—
1300
—
1500
—
1700
Order No. supplement for type of connection
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
196
232
281
352
433
542
617
748
954
1065
1200
1351
1524
1680
1864
2103
196
232
281
352
433
542
617
748
954
1065
1200
1351
1524
1680
1864
2103
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
1000
1100
1200
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
1000
1100
1200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
132
160
200
250
315
355
450
500
630
710
800
900
1000
1200
1350
1500
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
300
350
350
450
450
550
650
700
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
150
200
250
300
350
500
600
750
950
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1900
2100
Order No.
3RW44 22-@BC@4
3RW44 23-@BC@4
3RW44 24-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 26-@BC@4
3RW44 27-@BC@4
3RW44 22-@BC@5
3RW44 23-@BC@5
3RW44 24-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 26-@BC@5
3RW44 27-@BC@5
1
3
3RW44 34-@BC@4
3RW44 35-@BC@4
3RW44 36-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 44-@BC@4
3RW44 45-@BC@4
3RW44 46-@BC@4
3RW44 47-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 54-@BC@4
3RW44 55-@BC@4
3RW44 56-@BC@4
3RW44 57-@BC@4
3RW44 58-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 66-@BC@4
3RW44 34-@BC@5
3RW44 35-@BC@5
3RW44 36-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 44-@BC@5
3RW44 45-@BC@5
3RW44 46-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 54-@BC@5
3RW44 55-@BC@5
3RW44 56-@BC@5
3RW44 57-@BC@5
3RW44 58-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 66-@BC@5
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-9
General Technical Data
Heavy starting (CLASS 20) in an inside delta circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
50
62
81
99
133
50
62
81
99
133
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
15
22
—
—
18.5
30
—
—
22
45
—
—
30
55
—
—
37
75
—
—
—
22
30
—
—
30
37
—
—
45
45
—
—
55
55
—
—
75
90
—
Order No. supplement for type of connection
161
45
90
—
196
55
110
—
232
75
132
—
281
90
160
—
352
110
200
—
433
132
250
—
542
160
315
—
617
200
355
—
748
250
400
—
954
315
560
—
1065
355
630
—
1200
400
710
—
1351
450
800
—
1524
500
900
—
1680
560
1000
—
—
—
—
—
161
—
90
110
196
—
110
132
232
—
132
160
281
—
160
200
352
—
200
250
433
—
250
315
542
—
315
355
617
—
355
450
748
—
400
500
954
—
560
630
1065
—
630
710
1200
—
710
800
1351
—
800
900
1524
—
900
1000
1680
—
1000
1200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
45
55
73
88
118
45
55
73
88
118
142
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
1680
142
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
1680
Rated output of three-phase induction motors
for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
HP
HP
HP
HP
10
15
30
—
15
20
40
—
20
25
50
—
25
30
60
—
30
40
75
—
—
—
30
40
—
—
40
50
—
—
50
60
—
—
60
75
—
—
75
100
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
300
350
350
450
450
550
650
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
50
100
60
125
75
150
100
200
125
250
150
300
200
400
200
450
250
600
350
750
400
850
450
950
500
1050
600
1200
650
1300
750
1500
—
100
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
600
—
750
—
850
—
950
—
1050
—
1200
—
1300
—
1500
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
125
150
200
250
300
350
500
600
750
950
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1900
Order No.
3RW44 23-@BC@4
3RW44 24-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 27-@BC@4
3RW44 23-@BC@5
3RW44 24-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 27-@BC@5
1
3
3RW44 34-@BC@4
3RW44 35-@BC@4
3RW44 36-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 44-@BC@4
3RW44 45-@BC@4
3RW44 47-@BC@4
3RW44 47-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 55-@BC@4
3RW44 57-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 66-@BC@4
3RW44 34-@BC@5
3RW44 35-@BC@5
3RW44 36-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 44-@BC@5
3RW44 45-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 55-@BC@5
3RW44 57-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 66-@BC@5
2
6
3
4
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-10
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in an inside delta circuit
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated
operating
current Ie
Rated
operational
voltage Ue
V
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated output of three-phase induction motors
for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
15
22
—
—
18.5
30
—
—
22
45
—
—
30
55
—
—
37
75
—
—
—
22
30
—
—
30
37
—
—
45
45
—
—
55
55
—
—
75
90
—
A
50
62
81
99
133
50
62
81
99
133
Rated
operating
current Ie
A
45
55
73
88
118
45
55
73
88
118
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue
200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
HP
HP
HP
HP
10
15
30
—
15
20
40
—
20
25
50
—
25
30
60
—
30
40
75
—
—
—
30
40
—
—
40
50
—
—
50
60
—
—
60
75
—
—
75
100
3RW44 23-@BC@4
3RW44 24-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 25-@BC@4
3RW44 27-@BC@4
3RW44 23-@BC@5
3RW44 24-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 25-@BC@5
3RW44 27-@BC@5
142
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
142
173
203
251
312
372
485
546
667
856
954
1065
1200
1351
1472
Screw-type terminals
Spring-type terminals
50
100
60
125
75
150
100
200
125
250
150
300
200
400
200
450
250
600
350
750
400
850
450
950
500
1050
600
1200
650
1300
—
100
—
125
—
150
—
200
—
250
—
300
—
400
—
450
—
600
—
750
—
850
—
950
—
1050
—
1200
—
1300
3RW44 35-@BC@4
3RW44 36-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 43-@BC@4
3RW44 45-@BC@4
3RW44 47-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 53-@BC@4
3RW44 55-@BC@4
3RW44 58-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 65-@BC@4
3RW44 66-@BC@4
3RW44 35-@BC@5
3RW44 36-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 43-@BC@5
3RW44 45-@BC@5
3RW44 47-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 53-@BC@5
3RW44 55-@BC@5
3RW44 58-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 65-@BC@5
3RW44 66-@BC@5
Order No. supplement for type of connection
200 ... 460
400 ... 600
161
196
232
281
352
433
542
617
748
954
1065
1200
1351
1524
—
161
196
232
281
352
433
542
617
748
954
1065
1200
1351
1524
—
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
450
500
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
—
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
400
560
630
710
800
900
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
450
500
630
710
800
900
1000
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
300
350
350
450
450
550
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
125
150
200
250
300
350
500
600
750
950
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
Order No.
Spring-type terminals
Screw-type terminals
115 V AC
230 V AC
Order No. supplement for type of connection
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
1
3
2
6
3
4
Marginal conditions
CLASS 10 (normal starting):
Maximum starting time:
Current limiting
Starts/hour
10 s
300 %
5
CLASS 20 (heavy starting):
40 s
Set to 350 %
max. 1
CLASS 30 (very heavy starting):
60 s
Set to 350 %
max. 1
General marginal conditions
On-time motor
30%
Stand-alone installation
Installation altitude
max. 1,000 m / 3,280 ft
Ambient temperature
kW: 40 °C / 1,104 °F
hp: 50 °C / 122 °F
The motor outputs listed are only rough values. The dimensioning of the soft starter should always be carried out on the basis of the motor current (rated operating current). A model with a higher
output may be necessary for deviating conditions.
The motor output specifications are based on DIN 42973 (kW) and NEC 96/UL508 (hp).
For optimum dimensioning and/or deviations from the boundary conditions described, we recommend the use of the "Win Soft Starter" selection and simulation program, which can be
downloaded at: http://www.siemens.com/softstarter >Software
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-11
General Technical Data
10.3.2 Technical Data Power Unit
Type
3RW44 ..-.BC.4
3RW44 ..-.BC.5
3RW44 ..-.BC.6
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for standard circuit
Tolerance
V
%
200 ... 460 AC
-15 / +10
400 ... 600 AC
-15 / +10
400 ... 690 AC
-15 / +10
Rated operational voltage for inside delta circuit
Tolerance
V
%
200 ... 460 AC
-15 / +10
400 ... 600 AC
-15 / +10
400 ... 600 AC
-15 / +10
Maximum blocking voltage thyristor
V
1400
1800
1800
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Hz
%
50 ... 60
±10
Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Is)
%
115
Minimum load (% of set motor current IM)
%
8
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor
m
500 a)
Permissible installation height
m
5000 (for derating above 1000, see characteristic curves); higher on request
9 0 °
Permissible ambient temperature
Operation
Storage
°C
°C
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
≥ 5 mm (≥ 0.2 in)
≥ 75 mm (≥ 3 in)
≥ 100 mm (≥ 4 in)
0 ... +60; (derating above +40)
-25 ... +80
IP00
Degree of protection
a)
9 0 °
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 4 9
Permissible mounting position
and installation type (stand-alone installation)
During configuration, the voltage drop on the motor line must be taken into consideration up to the motor connection. It may be necessary to select a larger dimensioned soft starter with
regard to the rated operational voltage and/or the rated operating current.
Type
Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie
Carrying capacity, rated operating current Ie
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 / 50 / 60 °C
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM for motor overload protection
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx.
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C)
Permitted rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (CLASS 5)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 15)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 30 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For heavy starting (CLASS 20)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 40 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s
- Starts per hour3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
29
36
47
57
77
93
A
A
29 / 26 /23
5
36 /32 / 29
7
47 /42 / 37
9
57 / 51 / 45
11
77 / 68 / 59
15
93 / 82 / 72
18
W
W
8 / 7.5 / 7
10 / 9 / 8.5
400 / 345 / 290 470 / 410 / 355
32 / 31 / 29
36 / 34 / 31
600 / 515 / 440 725 / 630 / 525
45 / 41 / 37
940 / 790 / 660
55 / 51 / 47
1160 / 980 / 830
A
1/h
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
41
29 / 26 / 23
20
36 / 32.5 / 29
34
36 / 32.5 / 29
15
47 / 42 / 37
41
47 / 42 / 37
20
57 / 51 / 45
41
57 / 51 / 45
20
77 / 68 / 59
41
77 / 68 / 59
20
93 / 82 / 72
41
93 / 82 / 72
20
A
1/h
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
20
29 / 26 / 23
10
36 / 32.5 / 29
15
36 / 32.5 / 29
6
47 / 42 / 37
20
47 / 42 / 37
10
57 / 51 / 45
20
57 / 51 / 45
10
77 / 68 / 59
20
77 / 68 / 59
8
93 / 82 / 72
20
93 / 82 / 72
8
A
1/h
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
13
29 / 26 / 23
6
36 / 32.5 / 29
9
36 / 32.5 / 29
4
47 / 42 / 37
13
47 / 42 / 37
6
57 / 51 / 45
13
57 / 51 / 45
6
77 / 68 / 59
13
77 / 68 / 59
6
93 / 82 / 72
13
93 / 82 / 72
6
A
1/h
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
10
29 / 26 / 23
4
36 / 32.5 / 29
6
36 / 32.5 / 29
2
47 / 42 / 37
10
47 / 42 / 37
4
57 / 51 / 45
10
57 / 51 / 45
5
77 / 68 / 59
10
77 / 68 / 59
1.8
88 / 80 / 72
10
88 / 80 / 72
0.8
A
1/h
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
6
29 / 26 / 23
1.8
36 / 32.5 / 29
4
36 / 32.5 / 29
0.8
47 / 42 / 37
6
47 / 42 / 37
3.3
57 / 51 / 45
6
57 / 51 / 45
1.5
65 / 60 / 54
6
65 / 60 / 54
2
77 / 70 / 63
6
77 / 70 / 63
1
Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL/CSA.
Current limiting on soft starter set at 350 % IM; on-time OT = 70 %.
During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40 / 50 / 60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on the CLASS settings.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-12
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Type
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie
113
134
162
Carrying capacity, rated operating current Ie
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 °C
A
113
134
162
- At 50 °C
A
100
117
145
- At 60 °C
A
88
100
125
A
22
26
32
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx.
W
64 / 58 / 53
76 / 67 / 58
95 / 83 / 71
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C)
W
1350 / 1140 / 970
1700 / 1400 / 1140
2460 / 1980 / 1620
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM
For motor overload protection
Power loss
Permitted rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (CLASS 5)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
41
39
41
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
1/h
20
15
20
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
20
15
20
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
1/h
9
6
7
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 15)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
13
9
12
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 30 s
A
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 / 145 / 125
1/h
6
6
1
- Starts per hour3)
• For heavy starting (CLASS 20)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s
A
106 / 97 / 88
125 / 113 / 100
147 / 134 / 122
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
9
9
10
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 40 s
A
106 / 97 / 88
125 / 113 / 100
147 / 134 / 122
1/h
1.5
2
1
- Starts per hour3)
• For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s
A
91 / 84 / 76
110 / 100 / 90
120 / 110 / 100
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
6
6
6
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s
A
91 / 84 / 76
110 / 100 / 90
120 / 110 / 100
1/h
2
2
2
- Starts per hour3)
1) Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL/CSA.
2) Current limiting on soft starter set at 350 % IM; on-time OT = 70 %.
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40/50/60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
4) Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on the CLASS settings.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-13
General Technical Data
Type
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
203
250
313
356
432
Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie
Carrying capacity, rated operating current Ie
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 °C
A
203
250
313
356
432
- At 50 °C
A
180
215
280
315
385
- At 60 °C
A
156
185
250
280
335
A
40
50
62
71
86
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx. W
89 / 81 / 73
110 / 94 / 83
145 / 126 / 110
174 / 147 / 126
232 / 194 / 159
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C)
W
3350 / 2600 / 2150
4000 / 2900 / 2350
4470 / 4000 / 3400
5350 / 4050 / 3500
5860 / 5020 / 4200
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM
For motor overload protection
Power loss
Permitted rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (CLASS 5)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s
A
203 / 180 / 156
250 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
356 / 315 / 280
432 / 385 / 335
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
41
41
41
41
39
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s
A
203 / 180 / 156
250 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
356 / 315 / 280
432 / 385 / 335
1/h
20
20
19
17
16
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s
A
203 / 180 / 156
250 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
356 / 315 / 280
432 / 385 / 335
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
20
20
19
17
16
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s
A
203 / 180 / 156
250 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
356 / 315 / 280
432 / 385 / 335
1/h
9
10
6
4
5
A
203 / 180 / 156
240 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
325 / 295 / 265
402 / 385 / 335
1/h
13
13
10
13
11
A
203 / 180 / 156
240 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
325 / 295 / 265
402 / 385 / 335
1/h
3
6
1
2
1
A
195 / 175 / 155
215 / 195 / 180
275 / 243 / 221
285 / 263 / 240
356 / 326 / 295
1/h
10
10
10
10
10
A
195 / 175 / 155
215 / 195 / 180
275 / 243 / 221
285 / 263 / 240
356 / 326 / 295
1/h
1
5
1
3
1
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 15)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM
2) 4)
, run-up time 30 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For heavy starting (CLASS 20)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s
- Starts per hour3)
- Rated motor current IM
2) 4)
, run-up time 40 s
- Starts per hour3)
• For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s
A
162 / 148 / 134
180 / 165 / 150
220 / 201 / 182
240 / 223 / 202
285 / 260 / 235
- Starts per hour3)
1/h
6
6
6
6
6
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s
A
162 / 148 / 134
180 / 165 / 150
220 / 201 / 182
240 / 223 / 202
285 / 260 / 235
1/h
3
3
3
2
1
- Starts per hour3)
1) Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL/CSA.
2) Current limiting on soft starter set at 350 % IM; on-time OT = 70 %.
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40/50/60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
4) Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on the CLASS settings.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-14
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Type
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
3RW44 56 3RW44 57 3RW44 58 3RW44 65 3RW44 66
Power electronics
Carrying capacity, rated operating current Ie
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a, at 40 °C
A
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a, at 50 °C
A
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a, at 60 °C
A
438
489
551
615
693
760
880
970
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM for motor overload protection A
110
123
138
156
176
194
215
242
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 °C) approx.
W
159
186
220
214
250
270
510
630
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (50 °C) approx.
W
135
156
181
176
204
215
420
510
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (60 °C) approx.
W
113
130
152
146
168
179
360
420
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 °C)
W
7020
8100
9500
11100
13100
15000
15000
17500
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (50 °C)
W
6111
7020
8100
9500
11000
12500
13000
15000
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (60 °C)
W
5263
5996
7020
8100
8100
10700
11500
13000
A
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
A
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
A
438
489
551
615
693
760
880
970
Permitted rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (CLASS 5)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s, at 40 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 41
41
37
33
22
17
30
20
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s, at 40 °C
A
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
A
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
A
438
489
551
615
693
760
880
970
1/h 20
20
16
13
8
5
10
6
A
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
A
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
A
438
489
551
615
693
760
880
970
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s, at 40 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 10 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 20
20
16
13
8
5
11
6
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s, at 40 °C
A
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
A
494
551
615
693
780
850
970
1076
A
438
489
551
615
693
760
880
970
1/h 10
9
6
4
0.3
0.3
3
0.5
A
551
615
666
723
780
821
1020
1090
A
494
551
615
693
710
755
950
1000
A
438
489
551
615
650
693
850
920
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 20 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
• For normal starting (CLASS 15)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s, at 40 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 15 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 13
13
11
9
8
8
7
5
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 30 s, at 40 °C
A
551
615
666
723
780
821
1020
1090
A
494
551
615
693
710
755
950
1000
A
438
489
551
615
650
693
850
920
1/h 6
4
3
1
0.4
0.5
1
1
A
551
591
633
670
710
740
970
1030
A
494
551
615
634
650
685
880
940
A
438
489
551
576
590
630
810
860
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 30 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 30 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
• For heavy starting (CLASS 20)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s, at 40 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 20 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 10
10
7
8
8
9
7
5
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 40 s, at 40 °C
A
551
591
633
670
710
740
970
1030
A
494
551
615
634
650
685
880
940
A
438
489
551
576
590
630
810
860
1/h 4
2
1
1
0.4
1
1
1
A
500
525
551
575
600
630
880
920
A
480
489
520
540
550
580
810
850
A
438
455
480
490
500
530
740
780
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 40 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 40 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
• For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s, at 40 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 30 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s, at 40 °C
A
500
525
551
575
600
630
880
920
A
480
489
520
540
550
580
810
850
A
438
455
480
490
500
530
740
780
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s, at 50 °C
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 60 s, at 60 °C
- Starts per hour3)
1/h 2
1
1
1
1.5
1
1
1
1) Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL / CSA.
2) Current limiting on soft starter set at 350 % IM; on-time OT = 70 %.
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40 / 50 / 60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
4) Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on theCLASS settings.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-15
General Technical Data
10.3.3 Technical Data Control Unit
Type
3RW44 ..-.BC3.
3RW44 ..-.BC4.
V
%
mA
115 AC
-15 / +10
30
230 AC
-15 / +10
20
Rated control supply current ON
• 3RW44 2.
• 3RW44 3.
• 3RW44 4.
• 3RW44 5.
• 3RW44 6.
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
300
500
750
450
650
170
250
400
200
300
Maximum current (pickup bypass)
• 3RW44 2.
• 3RW44 3.
• 3RW44 4.
• 3RW44 5.
• 3RW44 6.
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
1000
2500
6000
4500
4500
500
1250
3000
2500
2500
Rated frequency
• Tolerance
Hz
%
50 ... 60
±10
50 ... 60
±10
Terminal
Control unit
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage
• Tolerance
Rated control supply current STANDBY
A1 / A2 / PE
Type
3RW44 ..
Control unit
Terminal
Factory setting
Control inputs
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Start motor right parameter set 1
No Action
No Action
Trip Reset
Supply
• Rated operating current
L+ / L-
• Rated operational voltage
L+
L-
Approx. 10 per input according to DIN 19240
Internal voltage: 24 V DC from internal supply
via terminal L+ to IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at
L+ approx. 55 mA
External voltage: DC externalvoltage
(according to DIN 19240) via terminals L- and
IN1 ... IN4
(min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC)
Thermistor motor protection input
Input
T1/T2
PTC type A or Thermo click
Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts)
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
13/14
23/24
33/34
95/96/98
Switching capacity of the relay outputs
230 V / AC-15
24 V / DC-13
Overvoltage protection
mA
deactivated
On-time motor
No Action
No Action
Group error
A
A
Short-circuit protection
3 at 240 V
1 at 24 V
Protection using varistor via relaycontact
4 A utilization category gL/gG;
6 A quick (fuse not included in scope of delivery)
Protective functions
Motor protection functions
Tripping when
Tripping class according to IEC 60947-4-1
Phase loss sensitivity
motor is thermally overloaded
CLASS 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 30
>40
%
Overload warning
Reset and recovery
Reset option after trip
Pre-charge time
Min.
Yes
Manual / automatic
Manual / automatic
1 ... 30
Device protection functions
Tripping when
Reset option after trip
Pre-charge time
Min.
thyristors thermally overloaded
Manual / automatic
0.5
Min.
bypass contacts thermally overloaded
Manual
1
Bypass protection functions
Tripping when
Reset option after trip
Pre-charge time
10
Manual
Manual
1
Manual
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-16
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Type
3RW44 ..
Factory setting
Control times and parameters
Control times
Switch-on delay (when control voltage applied)
Switch-on delay (automatic operation)
Pre-charge time (ON command with active stopping mode)
ms
ms
ms
< 50
< 4000
< 100
Network failure bridging time
Control supply voltage
ms
100
Network failure reaction time
Load circuit
ms
100
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection tripping
Device protection tripping
Min.
s
1 ... 30
30
1
Setting options for starting
Voltage ramp start voltage
Start torque control
Limiting torque control
%
%
%
20 ... 100
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
30
10
150
Starting time
Maximum starting time
Current limiting value
s
s
%
0 ... 360
1 ... 1000
125 ... 550 1)
20
deactivated
450
Breakaway voltage
Breakaway time
Motor thermal capacity
%
s
%
40 ... 100
0 ... 2
1 ... 100
80
deactivated
20
Slow speed mode counter-clockwise / clockwise
Speed factor in relation to nominal operating speed (n = nnominal/factor)
Slow speed torque 2)
%
3 ... 21
20 ... 100
7
50
Setting options for stopping
Stopping torque control
Stopping time
Dynamic braking torque
DC braking torque
%
s
%
%
10 ... 100
0 ... 360
20 ... 100
20 ... 100
Checking voltage
Checking line phases
Ready to start
10
10
50
50
Operating messages
Start mode active
Motor running
Stopping mode active
Emergency start active
No line voltage
Phase angle control failure
Warnings / error messages
Phase loss
• L1 / L2 / L3
Missing load phase
• T1 / T2 / T3
Failure
• Switching element 1 (thyristor) / switching element 2 (thyristor) / switching
Flash memory error
Supply voltage
• below 75 %
• below 85 %
• above 110 %
Current unbalance exceeded
Thermal motor model overload
Prewarning limit exceeded
• Motor heat build-up
• Remaining time for tripping
Bypass element fault
Line voltage too high
Device not identified
Versions not matching
Current range exceeded
Bypass element protective tripping
Overcurrent
Motor stalling – tripping
Current limit exceeded
Power unit
• Overheated
• Overtemperature
1)
3RW44 22 - 3RW44 47:
3RW44 53 - 3RW44 57:
max. current limiting value: 3RW44 58 - 3RW44 66:
550 %
500 %
450 %
2)
Reference quantity depends on motor used, but in any case lower than the
rated motor torque
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-17
General Technical Data
Type
3RW44 ..
Factory setting
Control times and parameters
Warnings / error messages (continued)
Temperature sensor
• Overload
• Wire breakage
• Short-circuit
Ground fault
• Detected
• Tripping
Connection break in manual operating mode
Max. number of starts exceeded
Ie limit value over / undershot
Cool-down time
• Motor active
• Contact block active
Heatsink thermistor
• Wire breakage
• Short-circuit
Quick stop active
Contact block defective
Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings
No external start parameters received
PIO error
Control inputs
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Parameterization options for control inputs 1 ... 4
Motor right parameter set 1
No Action
No Action
Trip Reset
No Action
Manual operation local operating mode
Emergency start
Slow speed
Quick stop
Trip Reset
Motor right parameter set 1
Motor left parameter set 1 1)
Motor right parameter set 2
Motor left parameter set 2 1)
Motor right parameter set 3
Motor left parameter set 3 1)
Relay outputs
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Parameterization options for relay inputs 1 ... 3
On-time motor
No Action
No Action
Group error
No Action
PIO Output 1
PIO Output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Run up
Bypass operation
Coasting down
On-time motor
Command motor-on
Fans
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group error
Bus error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Motor temperature sensor
1)
deactivated
Thermo click
PTC type A
deactivated
Parameter motor left only possible in combination with slow speed.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-18
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10.3.4 Conductor Cross-Sections
Type
3RW44 2.
3RW44 3.
3RW44 4.
3RW44 5.
3RW44 6.
Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type terminals
Main conductor:
With box terminal
3RT19 55-4G (55 kW)
3RT19 66-4G
—
Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
Finely stranded without cable end sleeve
Solid
Stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
2.5 ... 35
4 ... 50
2.5 ... 16
4 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
—
16 ... 70
70 ... 240
70 ... 240
—
95 ... 300
—
—
—
—
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness)
mm
6 x 9 x 0.8
AWG
10 ... 2/0
min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
3/0 ... 600 kcmil
—
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
6 ... 2/0
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
2.5 ... 50
10 ... 50
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
—
16 ... 70
120 ... 185
120 ... 185
—
120 ... 240
—
—
—
—
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness)
mm
6 x 9 x 0.8
AWG
10 ... 2/0
min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
6 ... 2/0
min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
250 ... 500 kcmil
—
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
mm2
2 x (2.5 ... 35)
max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
min. 2 x 50;
max. 2 x 185
min. 2 x 50;
max. 2 x 185
—
max. 2 x 70;
max. 2 x 240
—
•
•
•
•
NSB00479
Front terminal
connected
NSB00480
Rear terminal connected •
•
•
•
NSB00481
Both terminals
connected
Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
Finely stranded without cable end sleeve
Solid
Stranded
2
mm
2 x (4 ... 35)
max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
• Solid
• Stranded
mm2
mm2
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
2 x (4 ... 50)
—
max. 2 x 70
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness)
mm
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
AWG
2 x (10 ... 1/0)
max. 2 x
(20 x 24 x 0.5)
min. 2 x 2/0;
max. 2 x 500 kcmil
—
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
max. 2 x
(6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
max. 2 x 1/0
M10 (hexagon socket,
A/F4)
10 ... 12
90 ... 110
M12 (hexagon socket,
A/F5)
20 ... 22
180 ... 195
—
Nm
lbf.in
M6 (hexagon socket, A/
F4)
4 ... 6
36 ... 53
- Tightening torque
NSB00480
NSB00479
NSB00481
Both terminals
connected
Screw-type terminals
—
—
—
—
—
—
Main conductor:
With box terminal
Front or rear terminal
connected
—
• Finely stranded without cable end sleeve
• Connecting screws
Screw-type terminals
—
—
3RT19 56-4G
—
—
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
• Finely stranded without cable end sleeve
• Stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
—
—
—
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
—
—
—
—
—
—
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness)
mm
—
—
—
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
AWG
—
min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
6 ... 250 kcmil
—
—
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
• Finely stranded without cable end sleeve
• Stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
—
—
—
max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
max. 2 x 120
—
—
—
—
—
—
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness)
mm
—
—
—
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
AWG
—
max. 2 x
(10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
max. 2 x 3/0
—
—
• Finely stranded with cable lug
• Stranded with cable lug
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
mm2
mm2
AWG
—
—
—
16 ... 951)
25 ... 1201)
4 ... 250 kcmil
50 ... 2402)
70 ... 2402)
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
50 ... 2402)
70 ... 2402)
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width)
• Connecting screws
- Tightening torque
mm
—
—
—
—
17
M8 x 25 (A/F13)
10 ... 14
89 ... 124
25
M10 x 30 (A/F17)
14 ... 24
124 ... 210
60
M12 x 40
20 ... 35
177 ... 310
Main conductor:
Without box terminal / busbar connections
Nm
lbf.in
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235 from a conductor cross-section of 95 mm², the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to ensure phase clearance.
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 from a conductor cross-section of 240 mm² as well as DIN 46235 from a conductor cross-section of 185 mm², the 3RT19 66-4EA1
terminal cover is required to ensure phase clearance.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-19
General Technical Data
Soft starters
Type
3RW44 ..
Conductor cross-sections
Auxiliary conductor (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw-type terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG conductors
- solid or stranded
- Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
AWG
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)
2 x (20 ... 16)
Nm
lbf.in
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
• Connecting screws
- Tightening torque
Spring-type terminals
• Solid
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded
10.3.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Standard
Parameter
Electromagnetic Compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2
±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic HF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted HF interference
EN 61000-4-6
Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
HF voltages and HF currents on conductors
• Burst
• Surge
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
±2 kV/5 kHz
±1 kV line to line
±2 kV line to ground
EMC radio interference field strength
EN 55011
Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage
EN 55011
Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
EMC emission
Is a radio interference suppression filter required?
Radio interference suppression A (industrial application)
No
10.3.6 Utilization Classes
Regulation DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), and/or IEC 60947-4-1
differentiate two utilization classes designated as "Utilization class 1" and "Utilization
class 2". With both utilization classes, the short-circuit to be controlled is safely
switched off. The only difference is the degree of damage to the device after a shortcircuit.
ToC
1
ToC
2
Utilization class 1 The fuseless load feeder can be inoperative after each short-circuit tripping. Damage to the contactor and the
overload release is permissible. With 3RA1 load feeders, the circuit breaker itself always has utilization category 2.
After a short-circuit tripping, there must be no damage to the overload release or any other part. The 3RA1 fuseless
Utilization class 2 load feeder can be restarted without any components needing to be replaced. Only welding of the contactor contacts
is permissible, as long as they can be separated easily without any noticeable damage.
These utilization classes are highlighted in the Technical Data by an orange background.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-20
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10.3.7 Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)
Fuse assignment
The utilization class according to which the motor branch with soft starter is
dimensioned depends on the requirements of the application. Normally, a fuseless
design (combination of circuit breaker + soft starter) is sufficient. If the requirements
for utilization class 2 must be met, semiconductor fuses must be used in the motor
branch.
Standard circuit fuseless design
Q1
M
3~
Circuit breaker1)
Soft starters
ToC
1
Q11
Type
NS B0_01016a
Q11
Nominal current
440 V +10 %
Rated current
A
Q1
Type
A
Utilization class 12): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 66: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
29
36
47
3RV10 42-4HA10
3RV10 42-4JA10
3RV10 42-4KA10
50
63
75
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
57
77
93
3RV10 42-4LA10
3RV10 42-4MA10
3RV10 42-4MA10
90
100
100
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
113
134
162
3VL17 16-2DD36
3VL17 16-2DD36
3VL37 25-2DC36
160
160
250
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
203
250
313
3VL47 31-3DC36
3VL47 31-3DC36
3VL47 40-3DC36
315
315
400
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
356
432
3VL47 40-3DC36
3VL57 50-3DC36
400
500
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
551
615
693
3VL67 80-3AB36
3VL67 80-3AB36
3VL67 80-3AB36
800
800
800
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
780
880
970
1076
1214
3VL77 10-3AB36
3VL77 10-3AB36
3VL77 12-3AB36
3VL77 12-3AB36
3VL77 12-3AB36
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1) The rated motor current must be taken into consideration during device selection.
2) For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-21
General Technical Data
Standard circuit fused design (line protection only)
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
1
Q11
Type
NS B0_01477a
Q11
Line contactor up to 400 V Braking contactor1)2)
Line fuse, maximum
Nominal current
690 V +5 %
Rated current
A
E1
Type
A
Size
(option)
(Circuit suggestions from page 9-2)
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
Utilization class 13): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
29
36
47
3NA3 820-6
3NA3 822-6
3NA3 824-6
50
63
80
00
00
00
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RT15 26
3RT15 26
3RT15 35
—
—
—
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
57
77
93
3NA3 830-6
3NA3 132-6
3NA3 136-6
100
125
160
00
1
1
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 46
3RT15 35
3RT10 24
3RT10 25
—
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
113
134
162
3NA3 244-6
3NA3 244-6
3NA3 365-6
250
250
500
2
2
3
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 34
3RT10 36
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 45
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
203
250
313
2 x 3NA3 354-6
2 x 3NA3 354-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 54
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
356
432
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 64
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
551
615
693
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF69 44-0CM7
3RT10 64
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 66
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
780
880
970
1076
1214
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3
3
3TF69 44-0CM7
— 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
—
—
—
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 76
3TF68
3TF68
1) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.
If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used (for type, see table).
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
2) Additional K4 auxiliary relay:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
3) "Utilization class 1" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-22
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Standard circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE1 all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
For suitable fuse bases, see LV1 catalog at
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –> "Switch Disconnectors"
and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses"
and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
F´1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
2
Q11
Type
NS B0_01478b
Q11
All-range fuse
Nominal
current
A
Rated current
Voltage
E’1
Type
A
V
Size
Line contactor up to
400 V
Braking contactor1)2)
(option)
(circuit suggestions from page 9-2)
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
Utilization class 23): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
29
36
47
3NE1 020-2
3NE1 020-2
3NE1 021-2
80
80
100
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
00
00
00
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RT15 26
3RT15 26
3RT15 35
—
—
—
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
57
77
93
3NE1 022-2
3NE1 022-2
3NE1 024-2
125
125
160
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
00
00
1
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 46
3RT15 35
3RT10 24
3RT10 25
—
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
113
134
162
3NE1 225-2
3NE1 227-2
3NE1 227-2
200
250
250
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
1
1
1
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 34
3RT10 36
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 45
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
203
250
313
3NE1 230-2
3NE1 331-2
3NE1 333-2
315
350
450
600 +10 %
460 +10 %
690 +5 %
1
2
2
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 54
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
356
432
3NE1 334-2
3NE1 435-2
500
560
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
2
3
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 64
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
551
615
693
2 x 3NE1 334-2
2 x 3NE1 334-2
2 x 3NE1 334-2
500
500
500
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
2
2
2
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF69 44-0CM7
3RT10 64
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 66
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
780
880
970
1076
1214
2 x 3NE1 435-2
2 x 3NE1 435-2
2 x 3NE1 435-2
3 x 3NE1 334-2
3 x 3NE1 435-2
560
560
560
500
560
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
3
3
3
2
3
3TF69 44-0CM7
—2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
—
—
—
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 76
3TF68
3TF68
1) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.
If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used (for type, see table).
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
2) Additional K4 auxiliary relay:
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
3) "Utilization class 2" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-23
General Technical Data
Standard circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE or 3NC semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection using fuse, line and overload protection using circuit breaker)
For suitable fuse bases, see LV1 catalog at
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –>
"Switch Disconnectors" and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –>
"SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
F1
F3
Q21
Q1
Soft starters
ToC
2
Q11
Type
Q11
M
3~
Semiconductor fuse minimum
Nominal
current
A
690 V +10 %
Rated current
E3
Type
A
NS B0_01479a
M
3~
NS B0_01019a
F3
Q11
Semiconductor fuse maximum
Size
690 V +10 %
Rated current
E3
Type
A
Semiconductor fuse (cylinder)
Size
Rated current
E3
Type
Size
A
Utilization class 21): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
29
36
47
3NE4 120
3NE4 121
3NE4 121
80
100
100
0
0
0
3NE4 121
3NE4 121
3NE4 122
100
100
125
0
0
0
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
57
77
93
3NE4 122
3NE4 124
3NE3 224
125
160
160
0
0
1
3NE4 124
3NE4 124
3NE3 332-0B
160
160
400
0
0
2
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
113
134
162
3NE3 225
3NE3 225
3NE3 227
200
200
250
1
1
1
3NE3 335
3NE3 335
3NE3 333
560
560
450
2
2
2
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
203
250
313
3NE3 230-0B
3NE3 230-0B
3NE3 233
315
315
450
1
1
1
3NE3 333
3NE3 333
3NE3 336
450
450
630
2
2
2
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
356
432
3NE3 333
3NE3 335
450
560
2
2
3NE3 336
3NE3 338-8
630
800
2
2
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
551
615
693
2 x 3NE3 335
2 x 3NE3 335
2 x 3NE3 335
560
560
560
2
2
2
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
500
500
500
2
2
2
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
780
880
970
1076
1214
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 340-8
2 x 3NE3 340-8
630
630
630
900
900
2
2
2
2
2
2 x 3NE3 340-8
2 x 3NE3 340-8
2 x 3NE3 340-8
3 x 3NE3 338-8
3 x 3NE3 338-8
900
900
900
800
800
2
2
2
2
2
3NC2 280 80
3NC2 200 100
3NC2 200 100
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
1) "Utilization class 2" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-24
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
Soft
starters
ToC
2
Q11
Type
Nominal
current
A
Line contactor up to
400 V
Braking contactor1)2)
Circuit breaker
(option)
(Circuit suggestions from page 9-2)
440 V +10 %
Rated current
690 V +5 %
Rated current
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
Q1
Type
A
E1
Type
A
Line fuse, maximum
Size
Utilization class 23): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
29
36
47
3RT10 34
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RT15 26
3RT15 26
3RT15 35
—
—
—
3RV10 41-4HA10
3RV10 41-4JA10
3RV10 41-4KA10
50
63
75
3NA3 820-6
3NA3 822-6
3NA3 824-6
50
63
80
00
00
00
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
57
77
93
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 46
3RT15 35
3RT10 24
3RT10 25
—
3RT10 35
3RT10 36
3RV10 41-4LA10
3RV10 41-4MA10
3RV10 41-4MA10
90
100
100
3NA3 830-6
3NA3 132-6
3NA3 136-6
100
125
160
00
1
1
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
113
134
162
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 34
3RT10 36
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 45
3RT10 45
3VL17 16-1DD36
3VL17 16-1DD36
3VL37 25-1DC36
160
160
250
3NA3 244-6
3NA3 244-6
3NA3 365-6
250
250
500
2
2
3
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
203
250
313
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 44
3RT10 44
3RT10 54
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3VL47 31-1DC36
3VL47 31-1DC36
3VL47 40-1DC36
315
315
400
2 x 3NA3 354-6
2 x 3NA3 354-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
356
432
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 54
3RT10 55
3RT10 56
3RT10 64
3VL47 40-1DC36
3VL57 50-1DC36
400
500
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
551
615
693
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF69 44-0CM7
3RT10 64
3RT10 64
3RT10 65
3RT10 66
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3VL67 80-1AB36
3VL67 80-1AB36
3VL67 80-1AB36
800
800
800
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
780
880
970
1076
1214
3TF69 44-0CM7
—2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
—
—
—
3RT10 65
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 75
3RT10 76
3RT10 76
3TF68
3TF68
3VL77 10-1AB36
3VL77 10-1AB36
3VL77 12-1AB36
3VL77 12-1AB36
3VL77 12-1AB36
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3
3
1) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.
If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used (for type, see table).
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
2) Additional K4 auxiliary relay:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
3) "Utilization class 2" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-25
General Technical Data
10.3.8 Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)
Inside delta circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE or 3NC fuses (semiconductor protection using fuse, line and overload protection using circuit breaker)
For suitable fuse bases, see LV1 catalog at
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –> "Switch
Disconnectors" and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –>
F1
"SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
Q1
Q21
F3
NS B0_01596a
Soft
starters
M
3~
M
3~
Semiconductor fuse minimum
Nominal
current
ToC
2
Q11
Type
A
690 V +10 %
NS B0_01597a
F3
Q11
Q11
Rated current
E3
Type
A
Semiconductor fuse maximum
Size
690 V +10 %
Rated current
E3
Type
A
Semiconductor fuse (cylinder)
Size
Rated current
E3
Type
A
3NC2 280
3NC2 200
3NC2 200
80
100
100
Size
Utilization class 21)
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
50
62
81
3NE4 120
3NE4 121
3NE4 121
80
100
100
0
0
0
3NE4 121
3NE4 121
3NE4 122
100
100
125
0
0
0
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
99
133
161
3NE4 122
3NE4 124
3NE3 224
125
160
160
0
0
1
3NE4 124
3NE4 124
3NE3 332-0B
160
160
400
0
0
2
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
196
232
281
3NE3 225
3NE3 225
3NE3 227
200
200
250
1
1
1
3NE3 335
3NE3 335
3NE3 333
560
560
450
2
2
2
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
352
433
542
3NE3 230-0B
3NE3 230-0B
3NE3 233
315
315
450
1
1
1
3NE3 333
3NE3 333
3NE3 336
450
450
630
2
2
2
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
617
748
3NE3 333
3NE3 335
450
560
2
2
3NE3 336
3NE3 338-8
630
800
2
2
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
954
1065
1200
2 x 3NE3 335
2 x 3NE3 335
2 x 3NE3 335
560
560
560
2
2
2
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
3 x 3NE3 334-0B
500
500
500
2
2
2
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
1351
1524
1680
1864
2103
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 336
2 x 3NE3 340-8
2 x 3NE3 340-8
630
630
630
900
900
2
2
2
2
2
2 x 3NE3 340-8
3 x 3NE3 340-8
3 x 3NE3 340-8
3 x 3NE3 338-8
3 x 3NE3 338-8
900
900
900
800
800
2
2
2
2
2
Soft starters
ToC
2
Q11
Type
Line contactor up to 400 V
Nominal current (option)
A
Circuit breaker
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
Line fuse, maximum
440 V +10 %
Rated current
690 V +5 %
Rated current
Q21
Type
Q1
Type
A
E1
Type
A
Size
Utilization class 21)
3RW44 22
3RW44 23
3RW44 24
50
62
81
3RT10 36-1AP04
3RT10 44-1AP04
3RT10 46-1AP04
3RV10 42-4KA10
3RV10 42-4LA10
3RV10 42-4MA10
75
90
100
3NA3 824-6
3NA3 830-6
3NA3 132-6
80
100
125
00
00
1
3RW44 25
3RW44 26
3RW44 27
99
133
161
3RT10 54-1AP36
3RT10 55-6AP36
3RT10 56-6AP36
3VL27 16-.DC36
3VL27 16-.DC36
3VL37 20-.DC36
160
160
200
3NA3 136-6
3NA3 240-6
3NA3 244-6
160
200
250
1
2
2
3RW44 34
3RW44 35
3RW44 36
196
232
281
3RT10 64-6AP36
3RT10 65-6AP36
3RT10 66-6AP36
3VL37 25-.DC36
3VL47 31-.DC36
3VL47 40-.DC36
250
315
400
3NA3 360-6
3NA3 360-6
2 x 3NA3 360-6
400
400
2 x 400
3
3
3
3RW44 43
3RW44 44
3RW44 45
352
433
542
3RT10 75-6AP36
3RT10 76-6AP36
3TF68 44-0CM7
3VL47 40-.DC36
3VL57 50-.DC36
3VL57 63-.DC36
400
500
800
2 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3RW44 46
3RW44 47
617
748
3TF68 44-0CM7
3TF69
3VL67 80-.AB36
3VL67 80-.AB36
800
800
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3RW44 53
3RW44 54
3RW44 55
954
1065
1200
—2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7
—2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7
—2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
3VL77 10-.AB36
3VL77 12-.AB36
3VL87 16-.AB36
1000
1250
1600
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 3NA3 365-6
3 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3RW44 56
3RW44 57
3RW44 58
3RW44 65
3RW44 66
1351
1524
1680
1864
2103
—2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
—2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
—
—
—
3VL87 16-.AB36
3VL87 16-.AB36
3WL12 20
3WL12 25
3WL12 25
1600
1600
2000
2500
2500
3 x 3NA3 372
3 x 3NA3 372
2 x 3NA3 480
2 x 3NA3 482
2 x 3NA3 482
3 x 630
3 x 630
2 x 1000
2 x 1250
2 x 1250
3
3
4
4
4
1) "Utilization class 2" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-26
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10.3.9 Accessories
For soft starters
Version
Order No.
Type
PC communication program Soft Starter ES 2007
Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic
Floating license for one user
3ZS1 313-4CC10-0YA5
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
in 3 languages (German / English / French),
Communication via system interface
License key on USB stick, Class A, incl. CD
Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard
Floating license for one user
3ZS1 313-5CC10-0YA5
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
in 3 languages (German / English / French),
Communication via system interface
License key on USB stick, Class A, incl. CD
Soft Starter ES 2007 Premium
Floating license for one user
3ZS1 313-6CC10-0YA5
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
in 3 languages (German / English / French),
Communication via system interface or PROFIBUS
License key on USB stick, Class A, incl. CD
PC cable
for PC / PD communication with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
via the system interface, for connection
to the serial interface of the PC / PD
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
USB-to-serial adapter
For connection of the PC cable to the USB interface of the PC
3UF7 946-0AA00-0
Recommended for use in combination with 3RW44 soft starters, SIMOCODE pro 3UF7, 3RK3 modular safety system, ET 200S/
ECOFAST/ET 200pro motor starters, AS-i safety monitor, AS-i analyzer
PROFIBUS communication model
Module for insertion into the soft starter for integration of the starter into the PROFIBUS network with DPV1 slave functionality.
When connected to Y link, the soft starter only has DPV0 slave functionality.
3RW49 00-0KC00
3RW49 00-0KC00
External display and control module
For display and operation of the functions provided by the soft starter via an externally mounted display and control
module with degree of protection IP54 (e.g. in the control cabinet door)
3RW4 900-0AC00
Connecting cable
3RW49 00-0AC00
From the device interface (serial) of the 3RW44 soft starter to the external display and control module
• Length 0.5 m, flat
• Length 0.5 m, round
• Length 1.0 m, round
• Length 2.5 m, round
3UF7 932-0AA00-0
3UF7 932-0BA00-0
3UF7 937-0BA00-0
3UF7 933-0BA00-0
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-27
General Technical Data
For soft starters
Version
Order No.
Type
Box terminal block for soft starters
Box terminal block
3RW44 2.
Included in the scope of delivery
3RW44 3.
• Up to 70 mm2
• Up to 120 mm2
3RT19 55-4G
3RT19 56-4G
3RW44 4.
• Up to 240 mm2
3RT19 66-4G
3RT19
Covers for soft starters
Terminal covers for box terminals
Additional touch protection for mounting to the box terminals (2 covers required per device)
3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3.
3RT19 56-4EA2
3RW44 4.
3RT19 66-4EA2
3RT19.6-4EA2
Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections
3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3.
3RT19 56-4EA1
3RW44 4.
3RT19 66-4EA1
For 3RW44 soft starters
The operating instructions are included in the scope of delivery of the soft starters.
3ZX1012-0RW44-0AA0 on
request
Operating instructions
10.3.10Spare parts
For soft starters
Version
Order No.
3RW44 2. and
3RW44 3.
115 V AC
230 V AC
3RW49 36-8VX30
3RW49 36-8VX40
3RW44 4.
115 V AC
230 V AC
3RW49 47-8VX30
3RW49 47-8VX40
3RW44 5. and
3RW44 61)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3RW49 57-8VX30
3RW49 57-8VX40
115 V AC
230 V AC
3RW49 66-8VX30
3RW49 66-8VX40
Type
Fans
Fans
3RW49
3RW44 6
2)
1) 3RW44 6. connection on the output side.
2) For connection to the front side.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-28
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
10.4
Tripping Characteristics
10.4.1 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry
NSB0_01500a
Tripping
time t [s][s]
Auslösezeit
10 3
6
CLASS 5
CLASS 10
CLASS 15
CLASS 20
CLASS 30
4
2
10 2
6
4
2
10 1
6
4
2
10 0
1
2
4
6
10
x e
Class 5
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 30
10.4.2 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry
NSB0_01706
Tripping
time t [s][s]
Auslösezeit
10 3
6
CLASS 5
CLASS 10
CLASS 15
CLASS 20
CLASS 30
4
2
10 2
6
4
2
10 1
6
4
2
10 0
0,1
Class 5
10
1,0
Class 10
Class 15
x
Class 20
e
Class 30
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-29
General Technical Data
10.5
Dimension Drawings
3RW44 2
3RW44 3
3RW44 4
Type
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
q
3RW44 2
180
(7.09)
170
(6.69)
37
(1.46)
11
(0.43)
167
(6.57)
100
(3.94)
240
(9.45)
270
(10.63)
174
(6.85)
148
(5.83)
7,5
(0.30)
153
(6.02)
7
(0.28)
184
(7.24)
6,6
(0.26)
M6
10 Nm
(89 lbf.in)
10
(0.39)
3RW44 3
180
(7.09)
170
(6.69)
37
(1.46)
17
(0.67)
167
(6.57)
100
(3.94)
240
(9.45)
270
(10.63)
174
(6.85)
148
(5.83)
7,5
(0.30)
153
(6.02)
7
(0.28)
198
(7.80)
9
(0.35)
M6
10 Nm
(89 lbf.in)
10
(0.39)
3RW44 4
210
(8.27)
210
(8.27)
48
(1.89)
25
(0.98)
190
(7.48)
140
(5.51)
269
(10.59)
298
(11.73)
205
(8.07)
166
(6.54)
16
(0.63)
166
(6.54)
9
(0.35)
230
(9.06)
11
(0.43)
M8
10
15 Nm
(0.39)
(134 lbf.in)
mm (inch)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-30
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
3RW44 5 / 3RW44 6
Ø 13.5 mm (0.53 in)
3RW44 6
a
b
c
t
u
v
d
e
r
s
3RW44 5: M 12 ≤ 35 Nm / 310 lbf·in
3RW44 6: M 12 ≤ 35 Nm / 310 lbf·in
1L1
3L2
5L3
f
g
p
3RW44 6
w
A1 A2 PE L+ L-
1L1
d.c./c.d.
230 V
50 - 60 Hz
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
24V
5L3
3RW44 6
*E00*
G/031
127
2T1
NO
NO
NO
13 14 23 24 33 34
4T2
6T3
4T2
NC NO
95 96 98
6T3
q
m
n
h
2T1
o
Ue=200...460V
i
ad
k
l
3RW44 6
Type
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
k
l
m
n
3RW44 5
76
(3)
40
(1.6)
14
(0.6)
20
(0.8)
15,5
(0.7)
638,5
(25.2)
590
(9.45)
—
44
(1.8)
470
(18)
510
(20)
16,5
(0.7)
105
(4.1)
3RW44 6
85
(3.35)
50
(1.97)
14
(0.6)
—
—
667
(26.3)
660
(26)
160
(6.3)
37,5
(1.48)
535
(21)
576
(22.7)
16,5
(0.7)
103
(4.06)
s
t
u
v
w
ad
162
(6.4)
152
(5.9)
—
290
162
(6.4)
151,4
(5.96)
123
(4.84)
290
mm (inch)
Type
o
p
3RW44 5
253
(10)
623
(24.6)
q
r
—
—
—
249
(9.8)
3RW44 6
251
(9.88)
693
(27.3)
43,5
(1.71)
40
(1.6)
20
(0.78)
249
(9.8)
mm (inch)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-31
General Technical Data
ab
ac
x
ad
3RW44 6
y
z
aa
Type
x
y
z
aa
ab
ac
ad
3RW44 5
290
(11.4)
147
(5.7)
173
(6.9)
195
(7.7)
118
(4.6)
261
(10.2)
290
(11.5)
3RW44 6
289,5
(11.4)
175
(6.9)
173
(6.8)
—
118
(4.65)
261
(10.28)
290
(11.42)
mm (inch)
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-32
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data
External display and control module 3RW49 00-0AC00
(1.1)
(2.36)
(3.78)
(1.14)
(1.40)
55 (2.16)
92 (3.62)
Dimensions in mm (inch)
Installation cutout for external display and control module 3RW49 00-0AC00
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10-33
General Technical Data
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
10-34
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration Data
Configuration Data
Siemens AG
Technical Support Low-Voltage Control Systems
Tel.: +49 (0) 911-895-5900
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
1. Motor data
Siemens motor? ..............................................................................................................................
Rated output: ............................................................................................................................ kW
Rated voltage: .............................................................................................................................. V
Line frequency: .......................................................................................................................... Hz
Rated current: .............................................................................................................................. A
Inrush current: .............................................................................................................................. A
Rated operating speed: ............................................................................................................. rpm
Rated operating torque:............................................................................................................. Nm
Stall torque: .............................................................................................................................. Nm
Mass moment of inertia: ....................................................................................................... kg*m2
Speed characteristic curve / torque characteristic curve
(The differences in speed of the value pairs do not have to be identical)
nM
rpm
"nsyn"
MM / MB
Speed characteristic curve / current characteristic curve
(The differences in speed of the value pairs do not have to be identical)
nM
rpm
"nsyn"
IM / IB
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration-1
Configuration Data
2. Load data
Load type (e.g. pump, mill, ...):........................................................................................................
Rated operating speed: ............................................................................................................. rpm
Rated operating torque or rated output.............................................................................Nm or kW
Mass moment of inertia (load-based) .....................................................................................kg*m2
Mass moment of inertia (motor-based) ...................................................................................kg*m2
Speed characteristic curve / torque characteristic curve
(The differences in speed of the value pairs do not have to be identical)
nL
rpm
ML / MB
3. Start conditions
Start frequency....................................................................................................................... Starts
Operating cycle: Run-up time ........................................................................................................ s
Operating time .................................................................................................... s
Idle time .............................................................................................................. s
Stopping time...................................................................................................... s
Ambient temperature................................................................................................................... °C
Yes
Value
Starting current limitation?
..........................
Acceleration torque limitation?
..........................
Maximum starting time?
..........................
4. Personal data
Surname, first name:.......................................................................................................................
Company: .......................................................................................................................................
Department: ....................................................................................................................................
Street: .............................................................................................................................................
Postal code, city:.............................................................................................................................
Country: ..........................................................................................................................................
Phone.: ...........................................................................................................................................
Fax: ................................................................................................................................................
E-mail: ............................................................................................................................................
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
Configuration-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Index
Numerics
3-phase asynchronous motors
3RW44 2. 3-11
3RW44 22 9-4
3RW44 25 9-4
3RW44 26 9-5
3RW44 3. 3-11
3RW44 4. 3-11
3RW44 47 9-5
1-2, 6-20
A
Accessories 10-27
Ambient temperature 2-6
Application examples 2-3
Applications 1-7, 6-2, 6-6
Asymmetric limit value 6-20
Asymmetry 6-20, 10-29
Atmospheric pressure 10-4
Automatic restart 3-4
B
Branch layout 3-4
Breakaway pulse 6-7
Breakaway time 6-7
Breakaway voltage 6-7
Byte arrangements 8-40
C
Capacitor 3-10
CLASS 10 2-3, 6-21
CLASS 10A 6-21
CLASS setting 6-19, 6-20, 7-5, 10-12,
10-13, 10-14, 10-15
Clearances 3-3
Coasting down 2-3, 2-4, 5-21, 6-11
Combined braking 5-25, 6-13
Communication module PROFIBUS
DP 5-41, 7-3, 7-7, 8-1, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8,
8-9, 8-10, 8-14, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 10-27
Communication principle 8-6
Component layout 10-21
Conductor cross-sections 3-12
Configuration 2-2
Configuration with the GSD file 8-15
Connection examples 9-2
Connections 3-11
Control circuit 9-2
Control voltage versions 3-10
Current asymmetry limit value 6-20
Current limit values 5-27, 6-18
Current limiting 6-9
Current limiting value
6-9
D
Data Formats 8-35
Data sets 8-40
Data transmission 8-6
DC braking 5-24, 6-13, 6-14, 9-4, 9-5
DC braking torque 6-13, 6-14
Degree of protection 3-2
Device errors 7-7
Device interface 4-3
Diagnosis 7-2
Diagnosis via LED display 8-25
Diagnosis with STEP 7 8-26
Dimension drawings 10-30
Direct on line starting 5-18
Disconnector 3-4
Display measured value 5-41
Display settings 4-2, 5-33
Display, see operating and monitoring
module 2-2
Dynamic braking torque 6-13
E
Error 7-2
Error codes for negative data set
acknowledgement 8-38
Error messages 7-2
Error types 8-34
External display and control module
10-27, 10-33
External display and control unit 4-3
F
Factory settings
5-40
G
Ground fault 7-5
Group error 7-2
GSD file 8-15
H
Heavy starting
2-3
I
Idle time 6-20, 6-21
Inching 6-20
Inherent protection 6-23
Inside delta circuit 3-6, 9-6
Installation altitude 2-6
SIRIUS 3RW44 system
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Index-1
Internal run-up recognition
6-3, 6-5
L
Limiting torque 6-5
Line contactor 9-3
Line voltage 3-6
5-23, 6-12
Q
Quick start menu
M
Main circuit 9-2
Main contactor 3-8
Main current connection 3-11
Maximum pointer 8-37
Maximum starting time 6-3
Menu structure 5-2, 10-2
Messages 7-2
Motor control 5-43
Motor data 5-11
motor heat build-up 6-20
Motor heating 5-19, 6-10
Motor overload protection 6-19
Motor protection function 6-19
Motor protection settings 5-31
Motor starter configuration 8-15
Mounting Dimensions 3-3
Mounting position 3-2
N
Navigation 5-2
Normal or Heavy Starting
Normal starting 2-3
Pump stop
2-3
O
On-time motor 2-5
Operating and monitoring module, see
display 2-2
Overtemperature 7-5
P
Parameter 5-2
Parameter sets 5-10, 6-2
Parameterizing the inputs 5-28
Parameterizing the outputs 5-29
PC interface 2-2
Phase loss 7-3
PLC 3-4, 4-2, 5-43, 7-5, 8-37, 8-41, 8-49,
8-51, 8-55, 8-60, 8-62, 8-66, 8-67, 8-68,
8-69, 9-3
Prewarning limit 6-20
PROFIBUS 10-27
Profibus 4-3
Profibus interface 4-3
Protection against voltage failure 6-21
Protective functions 5-34
PTC thermistors 6-22
5-6, 5-7
R
Rated motor current 3-6
Rated operating speed 6-16
Rated operating torque 5-12
Reduce starting current 1-2
Relative humidity 10-4
Restart 3-4
Restore basic factory settings 2-7, 5-40
Reversed direction of rotation 9-6
Reversing operation 9-10
Run-up recognition 6-3, 6-5, 6-9, 6-10
S
Safety 5-48
Save settings 5-38
Saving options 5-37
Screw-type terminals 3-10
Selection criteria 1-7
Semiconductor fuse 3-9, 6-23
Semiconductor protection 9-2
Settings 5-9, 5-38, 5-39
SITOR 3-9, 6-23
SITOR fuses 3-9
SITOR semiconductor fuse 6-23
Slow speed factor 6-16
Slow speed function 6-16, 9-8
Slow speed parameters 5-26
Slow speed torque 6-16
Soft Starter ES 10-27
Soft starters
for high-feature applications
Box terminal block 10-28
Covers 10-28
Fans 10-28
PC cable 10-27
Software 10-27
Soft stop 5-22
Software 2-2, 4-3
Spare parts 10-28
Spring-loaded terminals 3-10
Standard circuit 3-5, 9-2
Standards 3-2
Start torque 1-2, 1-4, 6-3, 6-5, 6-7
Start voltage 6-3
Starting 1-6
Starting current 1-2
Starting mode 5-13
Starting the motor starter 8-22
Starting time 6-3, 6-5
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
Index-2
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Status diagram 5-30
Stopping modes 5-20, 6-11
Stopping time 6-12, 6-14, 6-15
Stopping torque 6-12
Storage temperature 10-4
Supply voltage 7-4
Switching element 3-4
Switching frequency 2-5
Symmetry 10-29
T
Technical data 10-5
Control unit 10-16
Power unit 10-12
Temperature 10-4
Temperature sensor 6-22
Thermo click 6-22
Torque control 5-16, 5-22, 6-5
Torque control with current limiting 5-17
Transport and storage conditions 10-4
Tripping characteristics 10-29
Tripping class 6-19, 6-20
U
Unpacking 3-2
User-specific commissioning
5-8
V
Very heavy starting 2-4
Voltage ramp 5-14, 6-3, 6-4
Voltage ramp with current limiting
W
Warnings 7-2
Water hammer
5-15
6-12
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Index-3
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
Index-4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Sender (please fill in)
Name
To
SIEMENS AG
A&D CD MM 3
Company / department
Address
92220 Amberg, Germany
Telephone
Fax: 09621 / 80-3337
Fax
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters System Manual
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual?
Please use this form to inform us about any errors.
All complaints and suggestions for improvements are very welcome.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Fax-1
Similar pages